JP2016195700A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an amusement of a presentation which urges a player an input to input means.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine 1 includes a presentation button 26 capable of being controlled to one of a plurality of modes including a first mode and a second mode. In the Pachinko game machine 1, whether or not to perform a special game is determined and if the special game is determined to be performed, the special game is performed. In the Pachinko game machine 1, if the presentation button 26 is operated, a presentation corresponding to the operation is performed. Along with an arrival of a prescribed period where an operation of the presentation button 26 is received, before the presentation button 26 is controlled to the second mode, a suggestion presentation for suggesting as such may possibly be performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 12

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that determines whether or not to execute a special game and executes the special game according to the determination result.

  For example, in a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins at the starting port, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game, and after the special symbol is variably displayed on a predetermined symbol display, the result of the determination is shown. The special symbol of is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, in a predetermined image display device, the decorative symbol is variably displayed with the special symbol variation display, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the determination is shown. The decorative design is stopped and displayed in a manner.

  Note that the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 includes an effect button that is operated by a player, and may perform an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button.

JP2013-183830A

  By the way, in a conventional gaming machine equipped with an input means such as an effect button, there is a case where an effect that prompts the player to input to the input means may be performed. In many cases, it is not necessarily highly interesting to produce a game that prompts the player to input to the input means.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the effect of prompting the player to input to the input means.

The present invention employs the following configuration in order to solve the above problems.
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes an input means that can be input by a player, a special game determination means that determines whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is executed when a start condition is established, and the special game. When it is determined to be executed by the special game determining means, a special game executing means for executing the special game and a predetermined effect corresponding to the input when there is an input from the input means during a predetermined period Production execution means for performing the operation, aspect control means for controlling the input means to the first aspect or the second aspect as the predetermined period arrives, and the input means by the aspect control means Suggesting effect executing means capable of executing an suggesting effect that suggests that the control is performed in two modes.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention includes an input means that can be input by a player, a special game determination means that determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when a start condition is established, and the special game determination means. When it is determined by the special game determination means that a game is to be executed, a special game execution means for executing the special game, and when there is an input from the input means during a predetermined period, a predetermined value corresponding to the input The effect execution means for executing the effect, the aspect control means capable of controlling the input means to the first aspect or the second aspect as the predetermined period comes, and the input means by the aspect control means. Before being controlled by the second aspect, there is provided suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect that suggests the fact.

  According to this invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the effect of prompting the player to input to the input means.

Schematic front view of pachinko machine 1 A plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 Explanatory drawing for demonstrating each state of effect button 26 Enlarged view of the display 4 in FIG. Schematic for explaining a configuration example of the second big prize opening 19 Explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game Screen diagram showing a screen configuration example of the liquid crystal screen 5 Explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of performance in the low base state Screen diagram showing a specific example of production when normal reach production is executed Screen diagram showing a specific example of the effect when the SP reach effect is executed Screen diagram showing a specific example of button production Screen diagram showing a specific example of button production Screen diagram showing a specific example of button production Time chart illustrating various timings related to button production Screen diagram showing a specific example of 2-line reach production Screen diagram showing a specific example of a three-line reach production Screen diagram showing a specific example of a three-line reach production The figure which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern selection table The figure which shows an example of the reach design selection table used for the process which selects the last reach design The figure which shows an example of the reach design selection table used for the process which selects the last reach design List for explaining decorative designs List for explaining special symbols A screen figure showing a specific example of one symbol icon change effect A screen showing a specific example of the push icon change effect A screen showing a specific example of the push icon change effect A screen showing a specific example of the push icon change effect A screen showing a specific example of the push icon change effect A screen showing a specific example of a three-design pseudo-ream of a successful performance pattern Screen diagram showing a specific example of a three-pattern pseudo-ream of failure production pattern A screen showing a specific example of a three-design pseudo-ream of a successful performance pattern Screen diagram showing a specific example of a three-pattern pseudo-ream of failure production pattern A screen showing a specific example of 5 symbol suggestion effects suggesting a loss A screen showing a specific example of 5 symbol suggestion effects suggesting a loss Screen diagram showing a specific example of 5 symbol suggestion effects suggesting development to specific reach effects A screen showing a specific example of the 7-pattern pseudo-ream A screen showing a specific example of the 7-pattern pseudo-ream Screen diagram showing a specific example of 7 design suggesting effects of a successful performance pattern Screen diagram showing a specific example of 7 design suggestion production of failure production pattern Screen diagram showing another specific example of 7 design suggestion of failure production pattern A screen showing a specific example of 9-design roulette production A screen showing a specific example of 9-design roulette production The screen figure which shows the concrete example of SPSP direct development suggestion production A screen diagram showing a specific example of a zone entry suggestion production of a successful production pattern Screen diagram showing a specific example of zone entry suggestion production of failure production pattern Screen diagram showing a specific example of the production of cars Screen diagram showing a specific example of the production of cars A screen showing a specific example of specific reach development suggestion production A screen showing a specific example of a car design slip production A screen showing a specific example of a car design slip production A screen showing a specific example of a chance eye effect A screen showing a specific example of a chance eye effect A screen showing a specific example of a chance eye effect A screen showing a specific example of a chance eye effect A screen showing a specific example of a chance eye effect A screen showing a specific example of a chance eye effect A screen showing a specific example of a chance eye effect The block diagram which shows the structural example of the control apparatus with which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided. The block diagram which shows the structural example of the image sound control board 140 A block diagram showing a configuration example of the main RAM 103 and various information stored in the main RAM 103 The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the game control board 100 Detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. 61 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. 61 is a detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. 62 and 63 are detailed flowcharts of the advance determination processing in steps S218 and S228. Detailed flowchart of the special symbol process in step S3 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of jackpot determination processing in step S309 of FIG. 65 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the production control board 130 68 is a detailed flowchart of command reception processing in step S10 of FIG. 69 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step 13 of FIG. 70 is a detailed flowchart of icon change effect pattern selection processing in step S136 of FIG. Explanatory drawing which shows an example of the change presentation selection table for jackpots Detailed flowchart of one symbol icon change effect pattern selection processing in step S1366 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the pressing icon change effect pattern selection processing in step S1376 of FIG. 70 is a detailed flowchart of the chance eye effect pattern selection process in step S141 of FIG. 69 is a detailed flowchart of the change start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the variation effect pattern selection processing in step S162 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the variation effect pattern selection processing in step S162 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the variation effect pattern selection processing in step S162 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the notice effect pattern selection processing in step S166 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the button effect pattern selection processing in step S1661 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of 5 symbol suggestion effect pattern selection processing in step S1674 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of 9-design roulette effect pattern selection processing in step S1682 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of SPSP direct development suggestive effect pattern selection processing in step S1691 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of zone entry suggestion effect pattern selection processing in step S1697 of FIG. 80 is a detailed flowchart of the vehicle pattern matching effect pattern selection process in step S1703 of FIG. 80 is a detailed flowchart of the vehicle symbol slip effect pattern selection process in step S1709 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the specific reach development suggestion effect pattern selection processing in step S1715 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of 7 symbol suggestion effect pattern selection processing in step S1720 of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the image sound control board 140 90 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step 41 of FIG. 90 is a detailed flowchart of the effect sound output control process in step 42 of FIG. 90 is a detailed flowchart of the effect sound output control process in step 42 of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process performed in the lamp control board 150 Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of button production Explanatory drawing which illustrates the reel arrangement in the spinning machine Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the modification of a chance eye effect

  Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Example of schematic configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
First, a schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 1 is a schematic front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing a part of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As illustrated in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a game board 2 provided with an accessory related to winning or determination and a frame member 3 surrounding the game board 2. The frame member 3 supports a transparent glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval. The glass board and the game board 2 form a game area 10 in which a game ball can flow down. Has been.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an upper plate 28 and a lower plate 29 provided below the upper plate 28. The upper plate 28 stores game balls and prize balls supplied to a launching device (not shown). The lower plate 29 stores game balls as prize balls that are paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. A take-out button 23 is arranged close to the lower plate 29. When the player operates the take-out button 23, a part of the lower surface of the lower plate 29 is opened, and the game balls accumulated in the lower plate 29 are moved to the lower plate 29. It falls into a box (not shown) arranged below 29. In other embodiments, the upper plate 28 and the lower plate 29 may be configured as a single plate.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the player holds the handle 20 and rotates the lever 21 in the clockwise direction, the game ball guided from the upper plate 28 to the launching device plays with a hitting force according to the rotation angle of the lever 21. Fired to the upper position in region 10. The game area 10 is provided with game nails, windmills, etc. (not shown), and the launched game balls change along the game board 2 while changing their moving direction by contacting the game nails, windmills, etc. Fall. Note that the game ball is temporarily stopped when the player operates the stop button 22.

  When the player performs a so-called “left strike” in which the lever 21 is rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched from the launching device with a relatively weak hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left area in the game area 10 as exemplified by the arrow 31. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called “right strike” in which the lever 21 is rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched from the launching device with a relatively strong hitting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right region in the game region 10 as illustrated by the arrow 32.

  A first starting port 11, a second starting port 12, two normal winning ports 14, and an electric tulip 17 are provided in the passing path of the left-handed game ball as a winning and determining role. In addition, in the passing path of the right-handed game ball, the second starting port 12, the first big winning port 13, the two normal winning ports 14, the gate 16, and the electric tulip 17 are used as a prize and a prize. , And a second grand prize opening 19 is provided.

  The game balls launched into the game area 10 flow down along the game board 2 in the process of flowing down along the game board 2, the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the first large winning port 13, the normal winning port 14, and the second large winning port. A winning can be made by entering any of the winning openings 19. As a result, a predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning location are paid out to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. The game balls that have not won a prize are discharged from the game area 10 through the discharge port 18.

  The first start port 11 is a start port that is always open, and the second start port 12 is a start port that is opened only when the electric tulip 17 as an ordinary electric accessory is operating. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball wins through the first start port 11, or when a game ball wins through the second start port 12, a jackpot game (special game) advantageous to the player Is determined, and the determination result is displayed on the display 4 described later.

  In the following description, the determination executed on condition that a game ball wins the first start port 11 is referred to as “first special symbol determination”, and the game ball wins on the second start port 12 is a condition. The determination to be executed is referred to as “second special symbol determination”, and these determinations are collectively referred to as “special symbol determination”.

  The first big prize opening 13 is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. A plate for opening and closing the first big prize opening 13 is provided at the opening of the first big prize opening 13. The first big winning opening 13 is normally closed by this plate. On the other hand, when the predetermined jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big jackpot” is stopped and displayed on the display 4, the plate is operated to open the first big winning opening 13. A jackpot game is executed. During the jackpot game, a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, nine game balls are won in the first big prize opening 13 or 29.5 seconds have passed since the first big prize opening 13 was opened). Until the first big prize opening 13 is maintained in the open state, the round game that is closed is executed a predetermined number of times. For this reason, the player can obtain more prize balls by making a right hit during the jackpot game compared to when the jackpot game is not being played.

  The second big prize opening 19 is opened according to the result of the special symbol determination. As illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 4, a first blade member 191 that opens and closes the second grand prize opening 19 is provided at the opening of the second big prize opening 19. As will be described in detail later, during the big hit game, following the round game in which the first big prize opening 13 is opened, the short open round game in which the second big prize opening 19 is opened shortly, or the second big prize opening 19 A long-opening round game in which the long-opening is performed is executed.

  In the short open round game, for example, the second big prize opening 19 is kept open until the predetermined condition that 0.1 second elapses after the second big prize opening 19 is opened and then closed. . On the other hand, in the long open round game, for example, there are predetermined conditions such that 29.5 seconds elapse after the second big prize opening 19 is opened, or nine game balls win the second big prize opening 19. The second big prize opening 19 is kept open until it is filled and then closed.

  The electric tulip 17 is disposed close to the second starting port 12 and has a pair of blade members. The electric tulip 17 has a closed posture in which the pair of blade members closes the second starting port 12 (see the solid line in FIG. 1), and an open posture in which the second starting port 12 is opened (see the broken line in FIG. 1). The posture can be changed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 1, the second start port 12 is normally closed by an electric tulip 17. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 16, it is determined whether or not the second start port 12 is to be opened, although no prize ball is paid out. Here, when it is determined that the second start port 12 is to be opened, the operation of returning to the closed posture after the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 has maintained the open posture for the specified time is performed a predetermined number of times. As described above, the second start port 12 is in a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass when the electric tulip 17 is not operated, whereas the game ball is easily passed by the operation of the electric tulip 17. Become. In the following description, the determination executed on condition that the game ball passes through the gate 16 is referred to as “ordinary symbol determination”.

  The normal winning opening 14 is always open like the first start opening 11 and is a winning opening through which a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. Unlike the first starting port 11 and the like, even if a game ball wins the normal winning port 14, no determination is made.

[Configuration example of presentation means of pachinko gaming machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the game board 2 or the frame member 3 is provided with a liquid crystal display device 5, a speaker 24, a panel lamp 25, a center lamp 30, and the like for performing various effects. Although not shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is provided with a first effect bonus 71 to a third effect bonus 73 (see FIG. 57), and the frame member 3 has a frame lamp. 37 (see FIG. 57) is incorporated.

  The liquid crystal display device 5 is an image display device that displays an effect image, and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 5 (hereinafter also referred to as “liquid crystal screen 5”) is provided at a position that is easily visible by the player. On this liquid crystal screen 5, for example, a decorative symbol for informing the determination result of the special symbol determination, a character or item for performing a notice effect, a hold display image (hold icon) displayed as many as the number of special symbol determinations being held. An effect image including various display objects such as an image display device is displayed, etc. The image display device may be configured by another image display device such as an EL display device.

  The speaker 24 produces a sound effect by outputting effect sounds such as music, voice, and sound effects in synchronism with the display effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 or asynchronously.

  Although not shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a first effector 71, a second effector 72, and a third effector 73 configured to be movable with respect to the game board 2. Three performance actors are provided (see FIG. 57). These effect actors 71 to 73 are connected so as to be able to transmit a driving force from a button motor 261 to be described later, and incorporate a button motor 261 made of an LED or the like, and each of the effect actors 71 to 73 itself. Various effects are performed by both or one of the movements and light.

  The panel lamp 25 and the frame lamp 37 perform various effects by light, such as changing a lighting or blinking pattern and changing a light emission color.

[Configuration example of input means]
As illustrated in FIG. 2, the frame member 3 is provided with an effect button 26 and an effect key 27 as input means for the player to input. The effect button 26 is a push button for inputting operation information when pressed by the player.

  FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each state of the effect button 26. The effect button 26 has a function as an effect means in addition to a function as an input means for the player to input. Specifically, the effect button 26 has a normal state (first mode: see FIG. 3A) and a protruding state (second mode: FIG. 3B) by the driving force from the button motor 261 (see FIG. 57). The height can be changed between (see)). Here, the normal state is a state in which the top surface of the effect button 26 is substantially the same as the top surface of the frame member 3 or at a slightly protruding height. The protruding state is a state in which the upper surface of the effect button 26 protrudes upward by a predetermined height (for example, 10 cm) with respect to the upper surface of the frame member 3. Thus, the effect button 26 is configured to be movable up and down with respect to the frame member 3 by the driving force of the button motor 261.

  In addition, the effect button 26 has a built-in button lamp 262 (see FIG. 57) formed of a light emitting element (for example, LED). By causing the lamp 262 to emit light, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 26. The button lamp 262 may continue to emit light for a predetermined time in a predetermined light emission color, or may flash rapidly in a predetermined light emission color. Further, the button lamp 262 emits light in any of a plurality of emission colors including colors such as blue and red.

  Although the detailed description is omitted, the effect button 26 can be pressed by the player even if it is controlled in any of a plurality of states including a normal state and a protruding state. It is configured.

  One effect key 27 is a so-called cross key for the player to perform a selection operation. The up key is for pointing up, the down key is for pointing down, and the left key is for pointing left. And a right key for indicating the right. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, there is a case where an effect corresponding to the operation of the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is performed. The effect buttons 26 and the effect keys 27 are also used for various setting operations.

[Configuration Example of Display 4]
The display 4 mainly displays information related to the special symbol determination and the normal symbol determination. As illustrated in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, the first A special symbol hold indicator 43, a second special symbol hold indicator 44, a normal symbol indicator 45, a normal symbol hold indicator 46, a game state indicator 47, a round indicator 48 and the like are configured.

  When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display 41 displays the symbol in a variable manner and then stops displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination, thereby determining the first special symbol determination. Inform the results. When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 42 displays the symbol in a variable manner and then stops displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the second special symbol determination, thereby determining the second special symbol determination. Inform the results. The first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 have a jackpot symbol indicating that the determination result of the special symbol determination is “big hit”, or the determination result of the special symbol determination is “lost” The lost symbol indicating is stopped and displayed.

  The first special symbol hold indicator 43 displays the number of holds for the first special symbol determination. The second special symbol hold indicator 44 displays the number of holds for the second special symbol determination.

  When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 45 notifies the determination result of the normal symbol determination by suspending and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the normal symbol determination after variably displaying the symbol. The normal symbol hold display 46 displays the number of holds for normal symbol determination. The game state display 47 displays the game state at the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 or the second special symbol indicator 42, the round indicator 48 opens the first big prize port 13 and the second big prize port 19 during the jackpot game. Display the pattern.

  In the following description, the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is referred to as “special symbol”, and the symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 45 is “normal symbol”. Shall be called. Further, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41 may be referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 42 may be referred to as “second special symbol”. .

[Internal configuration example of second big prize opening 19]
FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram for explaining a configuration example of the second grand prize winning port 19. As illustrated in FIG. 1 and FIG. 5, a first blade member 191 that opens and closes the second large winning opening 19 is provided at the opening of the second large winning opening 19. The second big prize opening 19 is normally closed by the first blade member 191. On the other hand, in a predetermined round during the jackpot game, the first blade member 191 is operated to open the second big prize opening 19 for a short opening round game, or the first blade member 191 is operated to operate the second large game. A long open round game in which the winning opening 19 is opened long is performed.

  Further, a second grand prize port switch 116, a V prize port switch 117, a discharge switch 118, a second blade member 192, and the like are provided inside the second grand prize port 19.

  The second grand prize opening switch 116 detects a game ball won in the second big prize opening 19. The V winning opening switch 117 detects entry of a game ball into the V area 195. The discharge switch 118 detects entry of a game ball into the lost area 196. The second blade member 192 guides the game ball that has passed through the second big prize opening switch 116 to the V area 195 or the loss area 196.

  When the big hit game is not performed, the second big prize opening 19 is closed by the first blade member 191 and the V region 195 is closed by the second blade member 192 (see FIG. 5A). On the other hand, after a predetermined number of round games for starting the jackpot game and opening the first grand prize opening 13 are performed, first, the first blade member 191 is rotated and the second big prize opening 19 is opened. It is opened (see FIG. 5B). As a result, the second big prize opening 19 is temporarily changed from the difficult entry state where the game ball is difficult to enter to the easy entry state where it is easy to enter. In the state shown in FIG. 5B, the V region 195 is closed by the second blade member 192. For this reason, the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening 19 is guided to the lost region 196 by the second blade member 192.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the start of opening of the second grand prize opening 19, the second blade member 192 opens the V region 195 for a set time (for example, 10 seconds) (see FIG. 5 (C)) is maintained, and then the closed position (see FIG. 5 (B)) for closing the V region 195 is returned. For this reason, while the second grand prize opening 19 is opened by the first blade member 191 and the V region 195 is opened by the second blade member 192, the game ball enters the V region 195 (hereinafter referred to as “V”). Also called "winning").

  As described above, in this embodiment, the V region 195 is difficult to pass through because it is difficult for a game ball to pass through the V region 195 by operating both the first blade member 191 and the second blade member 192 at the same time. The state temporarily changes from a state to an easily passing state.

  As illustrated in FIG. 5, a game ball entering the V area 195 is detected by the V winning opening switch 117. The V prize opening switch 117 has a function as a probability change switch. For this reason, when a game ball won in the second big prize opening 19 is detected by the V prize opening switch 117, a probability that the jackpot game is determined to be executed after the jackpot game is finished is relatively low. Transition from a state to a high probability state with a relatively high probability. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a so-called electric chew support function that makes it easy for a game ball to win a prize is given to the second starting port 12 in accordance with the transition to the high probability state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, “per short opening” that causes the first blade member 191 and the second blade member 192 to operate in an operation mode in which entry of the game ball into the V region 195 is difficult, and the V region. There are two types of jackpots, “per long opening” that operates the first wing member 191 and the second wing member 192 in an operation mode in which a game ball can easily enter 195, and basically the latter Only when a big win is won, it is possible to shift to the high probability state described above.

  In addition, the game ball entering the lost area 196 is detected by the discharge switch 118. A game ball that has passed through the discharge switch 118 always passes through the loss area 196.

  In another embodiment, the V prize opening switch 117 may be provided downstream of the V area 195 or in the V area 195, and the discharge switch 118 is provided downstream of the loss area 196 or in the loss area 196. It may be.

  Up to this point, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described based on FIGS. 1 to 5, but the configuration illustrated in FIGS. 1 to 5 is merely an example, and other configurations may be used. For example, instead of the second blade member 192, a configuration change in which a slide member that can slide between a position where the V region 195 is closed and a position where the V region 195 is opened is provided.

[About the game flow]
FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game. As illustrated in FIG. 6, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game is controlled in the “normal game state”, the “probability changed game state”, or the “short-time game state”.

  The “normal game state” is a normal game state in which special symbol determination is performed in a low probability state in which it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed, and the electric chew support function is not provided. In other words, in the normal gaming state, the probability that the jackpot game is determined to be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/399). Also, the probability that the second start port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/12), and the normal symbol variation time is relatively long (for example, 25 seconds). And the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 second × 1 time).

  The “probability game state” is a game state in which special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state in which it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed, and an electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the probability variation gaming state, the probability that it is determined that the jackpot game is executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/110). In addition, the probability that the second start port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 12/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is relatively short (for example, 2 seconds). And the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.6 seconds × 3 times).

  The “time-short game state” is a game state in which special symbol determination is performed in the low probability state described above and an electric chew support function is provided. That is, in the short-time gaming state, the probability that the jackpot game is determined to be executed by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/399). In addition, the probability that the second start port 12 is determined to be opened by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 12/12), and the variation time of the normal symbol is relatively short (for example, 2 seconds). And the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.6 seconds × 3 times).

  In the following description, a state in which the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 due to the addition of the electric chew support function is referred to as a “high base state”, and the electric chew support function is provided. A state in which it is not easy to win a game ball in the second starting port 12 due to the absence of the game will be referred to as a “low base state”.

  The game ball hit by the player to the right basically wins only the second start port 12 out of the first start port 11 and the second start port 12. In the low base state, the game ball is less likely to win the second start port 12 than in the high base state, and the first start port 11 is more in play than the second start port 12. It is easy to win a prize. For this reason, when the game is controlled in the low base state (the normal game state corresponds to this), the player plays the game by left-handed aiming at the first start port 11.

  On the other hand, when a game ball wins the first starting port 11 in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol determination is executed, and the first special symbol display 41 displays the first symbol after the special symbol is variably displayed. The special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. At this time, if it is determined not to execute the jackpot game, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When the above-mentioned jackpot symbol indicating per short-opening is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (see FIG. 6A), the short-opening of the second big winning opening 19 in a predetermined round during the jackpot game is short. An open round game is played. When this short open round game is performed, the game ball basically does not pass through the V winning opening switch 117 and enters the V area 195. Therefore, after the jackpot game is over, a special symbol determination is performed, for example. Until the game is played 100 times, the game is controlled in the short-time game state (see FIG. 6B).

  On the other hand, when the above-mentioned jackpot symbol indicating the long-opening is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (see FIG. 6C), the second big winning opening 19 is opened long in a predetermined round during the jackpot game. A long open round game is held. When this long open round game is performed, the player can easily enter the game ball into the V area 195. For this reason, when the game ball passes the V winning opening switch 117 (V winning) and enters the V area 195, after the jackpot game is finished, until the special symbol determination is performed 160 times, for example, the probability variation gaming state Thus, the game is controlled (see FIG. 6D).

  If the game ball does not pass the V winning opening switch 117 (V winning) during the long open round game, the game is controlled in the short-time game state after the jackpot game ends ( (See FIG. 6E).

  As described above, when the gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the probability-changing gaming state (or the short-time gaming state), that is, when the low base state shifts to the high base state, the second starting port is more than the first starting port 11. No. 12 makes it easier for game balls to win. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the high base state (the probability variation game state and the short-time game state correspond to this), the player plays the game by right-handed aiming at the second start port 12. .

  When the game ball passes through the gate 16 in the probability variation gaming state, a normal symbol determination is performed. As described above, in the normal symbol determination in the probability variation gaming state, it is determined that the second start port 12 is opened at a ratio of 12/12, and in addition, the open time of the second start port 12 is relatively long (this implementation) (In the form, 1.6 seconds x 3 times). For this reason, the game ball launched into the right area of the game area 10 easily wins the second starting port 12 and the second special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state. For this reason, in the probability variation gaming state, it is easier to win a jackpot than in the normal gaming state.

  When the right-handed game ball wins the second starting port 12, the second special symbol determination is performed, and after the special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 42, the determination result of the second special symbol determination A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined by the second special symbol determination that the jackpot game is not executed, the lost symbol is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the jackpot symbol indicating the long-open game is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 (see FIG. 6 (F)), and the V prize in the long-open game is displayed. As a condition, after the jackpot game is over, the game is again controlled in the probability variation game state.

  On the other hand, if it is not determined that the jackpot game is executed once even if the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is performed 160 times after the transition to the probability variation gaming state, After the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed, the gaming state is returned from the probability variation gaming state to the normal gaming state (see FIG. 6G).

  When the game is shifted to the short-time game state after the jackpot game is over, the player will play the game by right-handed aiming at the second starting port 12 because it is in the high base state like the probability variation game state. When the right-handed game ball wins the second starting port 12, the second special symbol determination is performed, and after the special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 42, the determination result of the second special symbol determination A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the jackpot symbol indicating the long-open game is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42 (see FIG. 6 (H)), and the V during the long-open game is displayed. On the condition of winning a prize, after the big hit game is over, the game is controlled in the probability variation game state. On the other hand, even if 100 special symbol determinations (mainly the second special symbol determination) are performed, if it is not determined that the jackpot game will be executed, the special symbol indicating the determination result of the 100th special symbol determination. After the stop is displayed, the gaming state is returned from the short-time gaming state to the normal gaming state (see FIG. 6I).

[Example of Screen Configuration of Liquid Crystal Display Device 5]
FIG. 7 is a screen diagram illustrating a screen configuration example of the liquid crystal screen 5. As illustrated in FIG. 7, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the low base state, a design area 50, a holding area 51, and the area 52 are formed on the liquid crystal screen 5.

  The symbol area 50 is an area for displaying a decorative symbol for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination. In the symbol area 50, the decorative symbol is variably displayed with the variation display of the special symbol, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination with the special symbol stop display.

  The holding area 51 is an area for displaying a holding icon that suggests that the first special symbol determination is held. In the holding area 51, the same number of holding icons as the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination indicated by the first special symbol holding indicator 43 are displayed. FIG. 7 illustrates a state in which four hold icons are displayed in the hold area 51 in order to suggest that the hold number of the first special symbol determination is “4” which is the maximum. Even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the low base state, the second special symbol determination may be suspended, but in the low base state, a suspension icon corresponding to this suspension is displayed. Never happen.

  The region 52 is a region for displaying a variation suggestion image (hereinafter referred to as “the icon”) that suggests that the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. The icon is displayed in the area 52 as the first special symbol (and decoration symbol) starts to be displayed, and is erased from the area 52 immediately before the first special symbol (and decoration symbol) is stopped and displayed. Is done.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, with the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (the hold icon displayed first) displayed in the hold area 51, the hold icon is displayed in the area 52. Shift processing of the icon to be moved to is executed. When other hold icons are displayed in the hold area 51, a shift process for shifting these hold icons to the area 52 side in the hold area 51 is also executed. For example, when the above shift process is performed in the state illustrated in FIG. 7, three hold icons are displayed in the hold area 51, and thereby the number of holds in the first special symbol determination is “3”. The player is notified that

[Flow of production in low bass state]
FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of effects in the low base state. When the game is controlled in the high base state, the player can make a right strike to easily win the game ball at the second starting port 12, whereas the game can be performed in the low base state. If it is controlled, it is difficult to win a game ball at the second starting port 12 even if a right hand is made. For this reason, when the game is controlled in the low base state, the player plays the game by left-handed aiming at the first start port 11.

  On the other hand, when a game ball wins the first start port 11, the first special symbol determination is executed. Then, after the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41, the first special symbol display 41 is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. On the other hand, the following effects are performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 with the display of the first special symbol.

  That is, on the liquid crystal screen 5, when the first special symbol determination is executed, the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol region 50 is started almost simultaneously with the first special symbol variation display being started (FIG. 8). (See (A)). Specifically, the liquid crystal screen 5 displays, for example, three rows of decorative symbols composed of several rows in which numbers 1 to 9 (see FIG. 21) are continuously written in the vertical direction. When the variation display of one special symbol is started, the variation display of the decoration symbol is started so that these decoration symbols scroll from top to bottom (see, for example, FIGS. 9A and 9B).

  Then, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of scrolling, for example, the left symbol which is the decorative symbol in the left column and the right symbol which is the decorative symbol in the right column are stopped before all the decorative symbols are stopped. . At that time, if the same decorative symbol does not stop on the active line, the reach is not established, and the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “lost” with the stop display of the first special symbol. Loss is notified when three decorative symbols (for example, loose eyes) suggesting this are stopped and displayed on the active line (see FIG. 8B). When the first special symbol determination is suspended, the earliest reserved icon displayed in the reserved area 51 is shifted to the area 52, and the decorative symbol is displayed along with the variation display of the first special symbol. The next variable display is started (see FIG. 8C).

  On the other hand, when the same decorative symbol is stopped on the effective line as the left symbol and the right symbol, reach is established (see FIG. 8D). When the reach is established in this way, a reach effect is executed to give the player a sense of expectation that the same decorative design as the left design and the right design will stop on the active line as a middle design and become a uniform design. The

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a normal reach effect, an SP reach effect, an SPSP reach effect, an increased reach effect, and the like are prepared as reach effects executed in accordance with the change display of the first special symbol.

  The normal reach effect (see FIG. 8E) is a reach effect in which, for example, an effect in which an animated character is active is developed as the scroll speed of the middle symbol is gradually reduced. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, the variation time of the first special symbol is easily set to a relatively long time, and conversely, it is “lost” Has a feature that the variation time of the first special symbol is easily set to a relatively short time. On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing” and the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a relatively short time, this normal reach effect is executed and at the end thereof “Lose” is easily reported. For this reason, it can be said that the normal reach production is a reach production that suggests that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively low.

  In the present embodiment, two types of reach effects, a short reach effect and a long reach effect, are prepared as the normal reach effect. Here, the short reach effect is a reach effect in which the effect execution time is shorter than the long reach effect. The long reach production is a reach production whose production execution time is longer than that of the short reach production. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a normal reach production, only a short reach production is performed, and a long reach production is performed after the short reach production (development from a short reach production to a long reach production). There are cases.

  When only the short reach effect is performed as the normal reach effect, the winning is notified at the end of the short reach effect (see FIG. 8B). In addition, at the end of the short reach production, the three rows of decorative symbols are displayed in a pseudo-stop manner so that they appear to be lost, and at least one of these decorative symbols is restarted (scrolling is resumed). In some cases, it may develop into an increased reach production (see FIG. 8H), which will be described later.

  On the other hand, when developing from the short reach production to the long reach production, when the winning ("big hit" or "losing") is notified at the end of the long reach production (see FIG. 8B), When the development to SP reach production is suggested at the end stage (see Fig. 8 (E) and (F)), the development to SPSP reach production is suggested at the end stage of long reach production. There is a case where it develops to SPSP reach production (see FIGS. 8E and 8G).

  Details regarding the development from these long reach effects to other reach effects (SP reach effects and SPSP reach effects) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  The SP reach production (see FIG. 8F) is a reach in which, for example, the production in which a live-action character is active takes longer than the normal reach production until the middle symbol stops on the active line. Production. This SP reach effect may be selected when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”. Further, the SP reach effect is easily selected when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing” and the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a longer time. For this reason, it can be said that the SP reach production is a reach production that suggests that the reliability for the jackpot is medium.

  The SPSP reach effect (see FIG. 8G) is developed over a longer time than the SP reach effect until, for example, the live-action character is active until the middle symbol stops on the active line. Reach production. This SPSP reach production is easily selected when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”. In addition, the SPSP reach effect may be selected even when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, but the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a relatively short time. Is difficult to select, and conversely has a characteristic that it is easily selected when the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a relatively long time. For this reason, it can be said that the SPSP reach production is a reach production that suggests that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively high.

  The increase reach effect is a reach effect in which the reach symbol and the effective line may increase after the reach is established. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, three types of increase reach effects are prepared as an increase reach effect: a one line reach effect, a two line reach effect, and a three line reach effect.

  The one-line reach effect is a reach effect that proceeds to the effect of aligning symbols without changing the number of reach symbols and the number of active lines. Therefore, it can be said that the one-line reach effect is a non-increase reach effect in which the number of reach symbols and the number of active lines do not increase. For example, when the reach is developed to the one-line reach production, the following production is performed. First, a predetermined increase production effect (not shown) is given to give a player's expectation that the number of reach symbols and the number of active lines will increase from “1” to “2”. Here, when a one-line reach effect is performed, the number of reach symbols and the number of effective lines do not increase as a result of the increased squeal effect.

  For this reason, in the one-line reach production, the number of reach symbols and the number of effective lines do not increase with respect to the increase production effect, and the player's expectation for the same three decorative symbols on the effective line is achieved. There will be a line-up of uttered symbols. For example, when a reach is formed by two two symbols, a symbol that enthuses the player's expectation that the same three decorative symbols (222) are aligned on the effective line defined by these two two symbols. A uniform production is performed. For example, the same pattern as the reach symbol (2 symbols here) is slowly scrolled around the effective line, and the same middle symbol as the reach symbol may stop on the effective line. Is an effect that gives the player. For this reason, the pattern matching production effect can also be regarded as a symbol stop production effect that enthuses the player's expectation that the same decorative design as the reach design stops on the active line.

  When the symbol matching effect is performed as described above, if it is determined that “big hit” at the start of symbol variation, the effect display that the same three decorative symbols are aligned on the effective line (reach symbol on the effective line) When the same middle symbol is displayed as an effect display indicating that the middle symbol is stopped), and it is determined that it is “losing”, the effect display indicating that the same three decorative symbols are not aligned on the effective line (effective line) An effect display indicating that a decorative symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped) is performed, and the one-line reach effect is ended.

  The two-line reach effect is a reach effect that proceeds to the effect of aligning symbols after the number of reach symbols and the number of effective lines increase to “2” in the middle. For example, when the reach is developed to the two-line reach production, the following production is performed. First, a predetermined increase production effect (not shown) is performed which gives a player's expectation that the number of reach symbols and active lines will increase from “1” to “2”. This increase production effect is performed in the same manner as the increase production effect performed in one line reach. Here, since the 2-line reach effect is selected as the increase reach effect, the number of reach symbols and the number of effective lines increase to “2” after the increase beat effect is performed (see, for example, FIG. 15C). ). FIG. 15C illustrates a state in which the reach symbol is increased to two of seven symbols and eight symbols, and the number of effective lines is increased to two. As described above, when the two-line reach effect is executed, the one-time increase effect is performed, and the number of reach symbols and the number of effective lines are increased to “2”.

  When the number of reach symbols and the number of effective lines increase to “2” during the two-line reach production, the symbol alignment production effect that reflects the player's expectation that the same three decorative symbols will be aligned on the first effective line Is done. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 15, there are two effective lines, an effective line defined by two 7 symbols as reach symbols and an effective line defined by two 8 symbols as reach symbols. For this reason, in such a case, for example, an effective line defined by a reach design (here, 7 symbols) having a smaller number is set as the first effective line, and the same three decorative designs are formed on the effective line. A symbol matching effect is performed in which the player's expectation for matching (for example, 777) is aligned (see, for example, FIG. 15D). Here, when it is determined as “big hit” at the start of symbol variation, the same three decorative symbols are aligned on the first active line and “big hit” is notified, and there is a two-line reach effect. May end.

  On the other hand, when it is determined as “losing” at the start of symbol variation, and it is determined as “big hit” at the time of symbol variation start, it is a pattern that develops to the second symbol uniform production effect as an effect pattern of the two-line reach effect Is selected, an effect display representing a state in which the same decorative design as the reach design passes on the effective line (deviates from the effective line) is performed in the above-described pattern alignment production related to the first effective line, It will be developed into a second design line-up.

  This second pattern matching production effect is a symbol matching production effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that the same three decorative symbols are aligned on the second effective line. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 15, the effective line defined by two 8 symbols is the second effective line, so the player's response to the same three decorative symbols (888) being aligned on the effective line A pattern-matching effect that raises a sense of expectation is performed (see, for example, FIG. 15F). Here, when it is determined as “big hit” at the start of symbol variation, an effect display in which the same three decorative symbols (888 in the example of FIG. 15) are aligned on the active line in order to notify “big hit”. This is the end of the 2-line reach production. On the other hand, if it is determined that “losing” is detected at the start of symbol variation, reach lose eyes (898 in the example of FIG. 15) in which the same three decorative symbols are not aligned on the active line in order to notify “losing”. The effect display to be displayed is performed, and the two-line reach effect ends.

  As described above, when the two-line reach effect is performed, the one-time increase effect regarding the increase in the number of reach symbols and the number of effective lines is performed, and then the one-time or two-time pattern adjustment effect is performed. It will be. More specifically, if it is determined that “losing” has occurred at the start of symbol variation, the symbol matching effect is always performed twice, and “losing” is notified in the second symbol matching effect. become. On the other hand, if it is determined that “big hit” at the start of symbol variation, the pattern hitting effect is performed only once and “big hit” is notified as a result of the symbol hitting effect, or the symbol matching hit effect Is performed twice, and the two-line reach effect is performed in any one of the patterns in which “big hit” is notified as a result of the second symbol alignment effect.

  The three-line reach effect is a reach effect that proceeds to the effect of aligning symbols after the number of reach symbols and the number of effective lines increase to “3” on the way. For example, when the reach is developed to the three-line reach production, the following production is performed.

  First, a first increase production effect (not shown) is performed to recite the player's expectation that the number of reach symbols and the number of active lines will increase from “1” to “2”. This increase production effect is performed in the same manner as the increase production effect in the 1 line reach production and the 2 line reach production. Here, when the 3 line reach effect is selected as the increase reach effect, the number of reach symbols and the number of effective lines increase to “2” as a result of the first increase effect (see, for example, FIG. 16C). ). Then, as a second increase production effect, an increase production effect (not shown) is given to raise the player's expectation that the number of reach symbols and the number of active lines will increase from “2” to “3”. The number of symbols and the number of effective lines will increase to “3” (see, for example, FIG. 16D).

  As described above, when the number of reach symbols and the number of effective lines increase to “3”, a pattern alignment effect is performed that reflects the player's expectation that the same three decorative symbols are aligned on the first effective line. Is called. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 16, there are an effective line defined by two two symbols, an effective line defined by two three symbols, and an effective line defined by two four symbols. A pattern matching effect is performed that provokes the player's expectation that the same three decorative symbols (222) are aligned on the active line defined by the reach symbol having the smallest number (here, two symbols) (for example, FIG. 16 (E)). Here, when it is determined as “big hit” at the start of symbol variation, the same three decorative symbols are aligned on the first active line and “big hit” is notified, and there is a three-line reach effect. May end.

  On the other hand, when it is determined as “losing” at the start of symbol variation, and when it is determined as “big hit” at the start of symbol variation, the pattern that notifies “big hit” in the second symbol matching production effect or the third symbol When the pattern that reports “big hit” in the uniform production effect is selected as the production pattern of the three-line reach production, the same decorative design as the reach design in the above-mentioned design uniform production effect on the first effective line is on the effective line An effect display representing a state of passing through (shifted from the effective line) is performed, and this develops to a second pattern matching effect.

  This second pattern matching production effect is a symbol matching production effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that the same three decorative symbols are aligned on the second effective line. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 16, the effective line defined by the two three symbols is the second effective line. Therefore, the player's response to the same three decorative symbols (333) being aligned on the effective line. A pattern-matching effect that gives a sense of expectation is performed (see, for example, FIG. 16G). Here, when it is determined as “big hit” at the start of symbol variation, the same three decorative symbols are aligned on the second active line, and “big hit” is notified, and there is a three-line reach effect. May end. This three-line reach effect is performed when a pattern for notifying “big hit” is selected in the second pattern matching effect.

  On the other hand, when it is determined as “losing” at the start of symbol variation and when it is determined as “big hit” at the start of symbol variation, a pattern for notifying “big hit” is selected in the third symbol matching production effect. In the case of the second effective line, the effect display indicating that the same decorative design as the reach design passes on the effective line (deviates from the effective line) is also performed in the above-mentioned pattern matching production effect for the second effective line. It will be developed to produce a uniform pattern.

  The third symbol matching effect is a symbol matching effect that gives the player's expectation that the same three decorative symbols are aligned on the third effective line. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 16, the effective line defined by the two four symbols is the third effective line, so the player's response to the same three decorative symbols (444) being aligned on the effective line A pattern-matching effect that gives a sense of expectation is performed (see, for example, FIG. 16I). Here, if it is determined as “big hit” at the start of symbol variation, the same three decorative symbols are aligned on the third active line and “big hit” is notified, and the three-line reach effect ends. To do. On the other hand, if it is determined that “Lose” at the start of symbol variation, an effect display indicating that the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol deviates from the effective line in the above-described symbol matching effect relating to the third effective line. This is the end of the 3-line reach production.

  As described above, when the three-line reach effect is performed, the two-time increase effect regarding the increase in the number of reach symbols and the number of effective lines is performed, and then the one-time, two-time, or three-time pattern assortment is performed. Production will be performed. More specifically, if it is determined that the game is “lost” at the start of the symbol variation, the symbol alignment effect is always performed three times, and the “losing” is notified in the third symbol alignment effect. become. On the other hand, if it is determined that “big hit” at the start of symbol variation, the pattern hitting effect is performed only once, and the pattern hitting effect is displayed as a result of the symbol matching hitting effect. A pattern in which “big hit” is notified as a result of the second pattern matching production effect performed twice, and a “big hit” is notified as a result of the third symbol matching production effect in three times. A three-line reach effect is performed in any of the patterns to be performed.

  As with the normal reach effect, this increased reach effect is difficult to select when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, and conversely, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “lost”. And it is easy to select when the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a relatively short time. For this reason, it can be said that the increase reach effect is a reach effect that suggests that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively low.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, with respect to a pattern that directly develops from reach establishment to increase reach production, when the variation time of the first special symbol is the first time (for example, 20 seconds), one line reach production is performed. Is selected, and when the variation time of the first special symbol is the second time (for example, 30 seconds), the 2-line reach effect is selected, and the variation time of the first special symbol is the third time (for example, 40 seconds). In some cases, the special symbol variation time (variation pattern) and the type of reach production are associated in advance so that the three-line reach production is selected.
For this reason, when the 1-line reach production, the 2-line reach production, and the 3-line reach production are compared, the reliability for the jackpot is relatively low. When the reach effect is executed, the reliability for the jackpot is slightly higher, and when the 3-line increase reach is executed, the reliability for the jackpot is the highest among the three types of increase reach effects.

  Therefore, when the increase reach effect is executed, the player can enjoy the increase reach effect while expecting the reach symbol and the effective line to increase after the reach is established.

  Up to this point, a case has been described in which one reach effect is executed after the reach is established, and whether or not the jackpot is notified at the end of the reach effect, but in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first special symbol. A plurality of types of reach effects may be executed within one variation.

  Specifically, when the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a relatively long time, that is, when the variation pattern of the first special symbol having a relatively long variation time is selected, for example, a normal reach production is performed. It may be executed and may develop into a higher reach production such as SP reach production or SPSP reach production in the middle or at the end of the normal reach production. This is a pattern that develops from a long reach effect, which is a part of the above-described normal reach effect, to an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect. Such development is the same when a short reach effect is performed as a normal reach effect. In other words, there is a case where it appears as a loss at the end of the short reach production and develops into an increase reach production. The same applies to the increase reach effect and the SP reach effect. For example, the final reach effect of the increase reach effect (the above-mentioned pattern alignment effect) is pretending to be lost, and the SPSP reach effect (or SP reach effect) is used. In some cases, it develops, or at the end of the SP reach production, it appears to be lost and develops into an SPSP reach production. Further, after developing from the normal reach production to the SP reach production, there may be a further development from the SP reach production to the SPSP reach production.

  For example, the development pattern that develops from the normal reach production to the SPSP reach production is selected when the variation time longer than the variation time that the development pattern that develops from the normal reach production to the SP reach production is selected. When the reach production that develops with the former development pattern is executed, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the reach production that develops with the latter development pattern is executed. For this reason, for example, it can be said that the reliability for the jackpot is the highest in the case of developing from the normal reach production to the SPSP reach production through the SP reach production.

  In this way, when one or a plurality of types of reach effects are performed during one fluctuation display of the first special symbol, a display indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination is accompanied with the stop display of the first special symbol. The decorative design is stopped and displayed in the manner (see FIG. 8B). Then, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which “big hit” is notified in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol, a predetermined opening effect (OP corresponding to the type of the big hit is given during the opening period of the big hit game. (Production) is started (see FIG. 8I).

  The reach effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are roughly classified into a first reach effect and a second reach effect. Here, the first reach effect is a reach effect that is performed in a state where the first number of display lines (for example, one) are displayed. In the present embodiment, the normal reach effect, the SP reach effect, and the SPSP reach effect are provided. And one line reach effect of the increased reach effect corresponds to this. On the other hand, the second reach effect is a reach effect that is performed in a state where display lines having a second display line number (for example, two or three) larger than the first display line number are displayed. Then, 2-line reach production and 3-line reach production of the increase reach production correspond to this.

  FIG. 9 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the effect when the normal reach effect is executed. As illustrated in FIG. 9A, for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of first special symbol determination is “1”, it is displayed in the holding area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 9B).

  When the first special symbol determination is executed, the effect content is set based on the determination result, and the effect of the set effect content is performed from the start of the change of the first special symbol to the end of the change. become. Specifically, for example, the following effects are performed.

  That is, for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation, first, for example, four symbols as a left symbol are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 9C). The “pseudo stop” means that the decorative symbols stopped in any of the left column, the middle column, and the right column of the symbol region 50 are continuously moved finely so as to be shaken without being completely stopped.

  Next, when the same four symbols as the left symbols are pseudo-stopped as a right symbol, reach is established (see FIG. 9D). When reach is established as described above, a reach line illustrated in FIG. 9D is displayed in order to indicate reach establishment. This reach line is an effect image showing a straight line connecting the left symbol and the right symbol displayed as the reach symbol. Thus, when reach is established and a reach line is displayed, for example, a normal reach effect is started (see FIG. 9E).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a decorative pattern is displayed on a predetermined display line (for example, on the reach line in FIG. 9D) in a predetermined manner (for example, in a state of being pseudo-stopped on the reach line). The reach state is displayed by displaying the above, and when the reach state is reached, the reach effect using the decorative design is executed.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 8, the normal reach production includes a pattern in which only the short reach production is performed and a pattern that develops from the short reach production to the long reach production.

  In short reach production, for example, when the same decorative design is aligned on the effective line as a reach design, the decorative design that is the same as the reach design stops in the middle row while gradually reducing the scrolling speed of the middle design. This is a reach production that enlivens the player's expectation of Here, if it is determined that “big hit” at the start of the symbol change, the reach losing eyes in which the middle symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped on the active line at the end of the short reach production will be displayed, and “lost” will be displayed. Notification is made (see FIG. 9I). On the other hand, if it is determined to be “lost” at the start of the symbol change, a so-called “zolo” with the same middle symbol as the reach symbol stopped on the active line is displayed at the end of the short reach production, and a “big hit” is reported. (See FIG. 9F).

Thus, when a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line in a specific manner (for example, when the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line in a state where three identical decorative symbols are lined up), a jackpot advantageous to the player A game will be executed. The specific mode in the present embodiment is a state in which three identical decorative symbols are arranged on the effective line. However, the specific mode is such that two identical decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) are spaced on the effective line. It may be arranged such that a special symbol suggesting a “big hit” is displayed between these two decorative symbols on the effective line.
In the present embodiment, a case where a display line indicating an effective line connecting two reach symbols (the reach line in FIG. 9D) is displayed only when reach is established will be described. It may continue to be displayed afterwards, or may be displayed during a part of the period after the reach is established.

  Although not shown in FIG. 9, there is a case where the middle symbol is restarted by pretending to be lost at the end of the short reach production, and developed into an increased reach production.

  In this embodiment, the description will be made assuming that the short reach production does not develop into the SP reach production or the SPSP reach production, but a configuration that develops from the short reach production into the SP reach production or the SPSP reach production may be adopted. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, although there is a pattern that develops from a short reach effect to an increased reach effect, it is assumed that there is no pattern that develops from a long reach effect to an increase reach effect described later. On the other hand, in another embodiment, a pattern that develops from a long reach effect to an increased reach effect may be prepared. Moreover, in other embodiment, the structure which does not develop from a short reach production to an increase reach production may be employ | adopted.

  Thus, the combination of the reach effect before development and the reach effect after development is not limited to that described in the present embodiment, and may be other combinations.

  Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the short reach production of the present embodiment, the same middle symbol as the reach symbol is stopped immediately after the reach is established (for example, several seconds after the reach is established), and the “big hit” is notified. There is also a pattern in which a middle symbol that is different from the reach symbol is stopped and “lost” is notified immediately after reach is established. When the middle symbol is pseudo-stopped in this latter pattern, the middle symbol is not restarted and developed into an increase reach production. After the middle symbol is pseudo-stopped, all three decorative symbols in three rows are fully stopped. "Lose" will be notified.

  Although the long reach effect is not shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, for example, a mission effect representing a state of attacking an enemy base is developed. When this mission effect is performed, in this embodiment, a destruction success effect or a destruction failure effect is performed as a result effect of the mission effect.

  In this embodiment, the destruction success effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined effect image indicating that the enemy base has been successfully destroyed after the mission effect is performed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the following successful destruction effects may be performed.

  For example, if it is determined that a jackpot game is to be executed ("big hit") and an effect pattern for notifying "big hit" is selected in the long reach effect at the start of symbol variation, explosions generated by an attack on the base There may be a successful destruction effect that represents the appearance of the same decorative design as the reach design. In this case, the same three decorative symbols are stopped on the active line and a “big hit” is notified (see FIG. 9F).

  Also, for example, when an effect pattern that develops from a long reach effect to an SP reach effect is selected at the start of the symbol change, the special symbol representing the character “SP” is effective when the explosion generated by the attack on the base clears. There is a case where a successful destruction effect representing a state of appearing above is performed (see FIG. 9G). In this case, the decorative symbol in the middle row (here, the special symbol representing the character of SP) restarts and develops into the SP reach production.

  Also, for example, when an effect pattern that develops from a long reach effect to an SPSP reach effect is selected at the start of symbol change, a special symbol representing the characters “SPSP” is effective when the explosion generated by the attack on the base clears. There is a case where a successful destruction effect representing a state of appearing above is performed (see FIG. 9H). In this case, the decorative symbol in the middle row (here, the special symbol representing the SPSP character) restarts and develops into the SPSP reach production.

  In this embodiment, the destruction failure effect is an effect of displaying a predetermined effect image indicating that the destruction of the enemy base has failed after the above-described mission effect is performed. For example, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed ("losing") and the effect pattern for notifying "losing" is selected in the long reach effect at the start of symbol change, the explosion generated by the attack on the base is clear. Thus, a destruction failure effect representing the appearance of a decorative design different from the reach design is performed (see FIG. 9I).

  In addition, when an effect pattern that develops from a long reach effect to an increased reach effect is selected at the start of the symbol change, a decorative pattern that is different from the reach symbol in the same way as in the case of notifying “losing” in the long reach effect ( In the example shown in FIG. 9 (I), after the appearance of 5 symbols), the decorative symbols are restarted and developed into an increased reach effect.

  As described above, the SP reach production and the SPSP reach production are reach productions that have a higher degree of reliability with respect to the jackpot than the normal reach production. For this reason, it is preferable not to perform the effect display which is not directly related to these reach effects as much as possible. For this reason, in the present embodiment, while the effect image and the hold icon representing the reserved area 51 are displayed during the normal reach effect, the effect image and the hold indicating the hold area 51 are displayed during the SP reach effect and the SPSP reach effect. The icon is not displayed. The same applies to the case where the increase reach effect is executed.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 9, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the jackpot game is executed as a result effect of the mission effect based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination (that is, In some cases, a successful destruction effect (first effect) for notifying "big hit") is executed. Moreover, the destruction success effect (2nd effect) which suggests developing to the SP reach effect (or SPSP reach effect) performed as a back | latter stage effect after the normal reach effect as a front | former stage effect may be performed. In addition, there is a case where a destruction failure effect for notifying that the jackpot game is not executed (that is, “losing”) is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the above-described mission effect becomes an effect branch, and as a result effect of the mission effect, a pattern in which “big hit” is notified, and a pattern in which a loss is notified (see FIG. 9 (I)). , A pattern that suggests development to an increased reach production (see FIG. 9I), a pattern that suggests development to an SP reach production (see FIG. 9G), and a development to an SPSP reach production Five effect patterns of prepared patterns (see FIG. 9H) are prepared. That is, the mission effect performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is characterized in that the content of the effect branches in a plurality of directions even if the successful destruction effect is performed as the result. There is.

  For this reason, for example, it is possible to perform an effective result effect having a higher effect as compared to a result effect informing only the winning ("big hit" or "losing").

In other embodiments, the following configuration may be employed.
That is, for example, a configuration may be employed in which two effect patterns are prepared, that is, a pattern in which “losing” is subsequently notified by the result effect described above, and a pattern that suggests development to an SP reach effect.

  In addition, for example, a configuration may be employed in which two effect patterns are prepared, that is, a pattern in which “losing” is subsequently notified by the result effect and a pattern that suggests development to an SPSP reach effect.

  In addition, for example, three effect patterns are prepared: a pattern in which “big hit” is notified afterwards, a pattern in which “losing” is notified, and a pattern that suggests development to an SP reach effect. A configuration may be adopted.

  In addition, for example, the above-described result production has three production routes: a pattern in which “big hit” is subsequently notified, a pattern in which “losing” is informed, and a pattern that suggests development to an SPP reach production. A configuration may be adopted.

  FIG. 10 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the effect when the SP reach effect is executed. For example, when developing from the normal reach effect to the SP reach effect in the flow illustrated in FIGS. 9E and 9G, the left and right symbols, which are the reach symbols, are slightly reduced and slightly placed at both ends of the liquid crystal screen 5. In the moved state, the effect image of the SP reach effect is displayed using the center portion of the liquid crystal screen (see FIG. 10A).

  Then, at the end of the SP reach production, an effect display is given that shows the player's expectation that the same middle design as the reach design will stop on the active line, and when it is determined that it is `` big hit '' at the start of symbol variation, The jackpot is notified with the symbols aligned (see FIG. 10B). In this case, during the jackpot game opening period, a big win and an effect display that prompts the player to make a right strike are performed (see FIG. 10C).

  On the other hand, when it is determined as “losing” at the start of symbol variation, the middle symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped and the loss is notified (see FIG. 10D). When the first special symbol determination is held, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon is executed, the first hold icon and other hold icons are shifted, and the first special symbol determination is performed. Variation display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol corresponding to the previous hold icon is started (see FIG. 10E).

  In addition, when a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time of the first special symbol is selected at the start of symbol variation, the SP reach effect may be developed to the SPSP reach effect. Specifically, for example, after a middle symbol different from the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped, a restart effect is performed that suggests that the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol restart and develop into an SPSP reach effect ( (See FIG. 10G). FIG. 10G shows a state in which three decorative symbols are displayed as small symbols at the lower right of the screen in order not to display the decorative symbols in the area where the restart effect image is displayed. Yes. Thus, when it is preferable not to display the decorative symbol in the symbol region 50, the three decorative symbols may be displayed as small symbols in a region different from the symbol region 50 in some cases.

  When the restart effect is performed and the SPSP reach effect is developed, the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the reach symbol are displayed at the left and right ends of the symbol region 50, and the SPSP reach effect image is displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. Is performed (see FIG. 10H). After the SPSP reach production, the winning effect is announced to inform the determination result of the first special symbol determination after the player's expectation for the symbol alignment is performed (see FIG. 10 (I)). . FIG. 10I illustrates a state in which the symbols are aligned in order to notify that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reach is established by variably displaying the decorative symbol with the variation display of the first special symbol on the liquid crystal screen 5, the reach symbol that forms the reach is formed. The reach effect is displayed, and finally, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of symbol variation. The same applies to the increase reach effect described later.

[Button production]
Hereinafter, the button effects performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 11 to 13 are screen views showing specific examples of button effects. FIG. 14 is a time chart illustrating various timings related to button effects.

  In the button effect, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 26 during an effective period in which the operation of the effect button 26 is effective, an effect corresponding to the operation is executed. In the present embodiment, four types of button effects, a first button effect, a second button effect, a third button effect, and a fourth button effect, are prepared as the button effects.

  The first button effect controls the effect button 26 to the normal state (see FIG. 3A) with the arrival of the first effective period, prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 in the normal state, and the operation is performed. In the event that it is interrupted, an effect corresponding to the operation is executed (see, for example, FIGS. 11D and 11E). In addition, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where the 1st effective period of 1st button production is set to 5 second, this 1st effective period may be another time (for example, 3 seconds).

  The second button effect performs control to change the effect button 26 from the normal state (see FIG. 3A) to the protruding state (see FIG. 3B) with the arrival of the second effective period. The player is prompted to operate the effect button 26, and when the operation is performed, an effect corresponding to the operation is executed (see, for example, FIGS. 11G and 11H). In addition, although this embodiment demonstrates the case where the 2nd effective period of 2nd button production is set to 5 second, this 2nd effective period may be another time (for example, 3 second).

  The third button effect controls the effect button 26 to the normal state (see FIG. 3A) with the arrival of the third effective period, prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 in the normal state, and the operation is performed. If it is interrupted, an effect corresponding to the operation is executed (see, for example, FIGS. 13B to 13E). The third effective period of the third button effect is set to 5 seconds from the start of the third effective period to the end of the third effective period. It differs from the effective period of the first button effect and the second button effect in that there is a non-effective period (1 second in the present embodiment) in which the operation is not effective even when the effect button 26 is operated. For this reason, the third effective period of the third button effect is substantially 4 seconds (= 1 second + 3 seconds) (see FIG. 14C).

  In the fourth button effect, the effect button 26 is controlled to change from the normal state to the protruding state (see FIG. 3B) with the arrival of the fourth effective period, and the player operates the operation of the protruding button 26 in the protruding state. When the operation is performed, an effect corresponding to the operation is executed (see, for example, FIGS. 13B, 13C, 13F, and 13G). In this embodiment, the fourth effective period of the fourth button effect employs the same configuration as the third effective period of the third button effect.

  FIG. 11 illustrates a state in which the first button effect or the second button effect is performed during the SPSP reach effect. As illustrated in FIG. 11A, during the SPSP reach effect, the SPSP reach effect image is displayed mainly using the center portion of the liquid crystal screen 5 with the reach symbols displayed on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal screen 5. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the predetermined time before the first valid period of the first button effect is reached, the following effect display is started.

  That is, as illustrated in FIGS. 11A and 11B, first, the reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol) displayed on the left and right sides of the liquid crystal screen 5 as the reach symbols are enlarged. Along with this, three decorative symbols including reach symbols begin to be displayed at the lower right of the screen as small symbols (see FIG. 11B). Then, when the left symbol and the right symbol constituting the reach symbol are enlarged, these decorative symbols finally move while drawing a circle around the central portion of the liquid crystal screen 5, for example. A predetermined deformation action is performed so that the two merge to form one specific emblem (see FIG. 11C). This reach symbol deformation action is performed from a predetermined time before the first effective period of the first button effect starts until the first effective period starts. In this deformation action, two reach symbols (here, four symbols) once form an emblem, and an effect display in which the emblem changes to a button image (see FIG. 11D) is performed.

  By the way, if the reach symbol is changed during the execution of the reach effect, the player may not be able to easily recognize that the reach has been established or that the reach effect is being executed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, before the reach symbol is changed, the decorative symbol displayed in the symbol region 50 is displayed small in the corner of the liquid crystal screen 5 as a small symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the reach has been established or that the reach effect is being executed based on the small symbols.

  When the first valid period of the first button effect is reached, as illustrated in FIG. 11D, a first button image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 controlled to the normal state is displayed. Specifically, for example, a button image simulating the effect button 26 in the normal state and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the first effective period in which the operation of the effect button 26 is effective are displayed. Further, when the first effective period is reached, a button lamp 262 (see FIG. 57) built in the effect button 26 emits light in order to imply that the operation of the effect button 26 becomes effective.

  As described above, during the first effective period of the first button effect, the effect button 26 is controlled to the normal state (first mode), and the operation becomes effective when the effect button 26 is operated. Is notified. For this reason, the player can easily perform the operation of the effect button 26 controlled to the normal state based on the first button image.

  When the effect button 26 is operated during the first effective period of the first button effect, an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 11E, an effect called cut-in for displaying a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed. The operation corresponding effect is not limited to this, and may be another effect (for example, a group notice in which a large number of characters move on the screen).

  As described above, after the operation corresponding effect is performed in response to the button operation during the first effective period of the first button effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. (See FIG. 11F). In addition, although the case where “losing” is notified is illustrated in FIG. 11F, there is a case where “big hit” is notified after the operation corresponding effect is performed.

  In the present embodiment, if the effect button 26 is not operated during the first effective period, the operation-compatible effect is not performed. On the other hand, in other embodiments, when the effect button 26 is not operated during the first effective period, for example, the same effect (or different) as the operation corresponding effect performed when the effect button 26 is operated. For example, the production may be performed at the timing when the first effective period ends. The same applies to the second button effect, the third button effect, and the fourth button effect.

  So far, the case has been described where the production button 26 is controlled to the normal state with the arrival of the first effective period of the first button production (the normal state of the production button 26 is maintained). A first button effect may be performed in which the effect button 26 is controlled in a protruding state with the arrival of the first effective period. In this case, the following effects are performed following the reach symbol deformation action illustrated in FIG.

  That is, when the second effective period of the second button effect is reached, as illustrated in FIG. 11G, a second button image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 controlled to the protruding state is displayed. The Specifically, for example, a button image simulating the effect button 26 in the protruding state and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the second effective period in which the operation of the effect button 26 is effective are displayed. Further, during the second effective period, the button lamp 262 emits light as in the first effective period.

  As described above, during the second effective period of the second button effect, the effect button 26 is controlled to be in the protruding state (second mode), and when the effect button 26 is operated, the operation becomes effective. Is notified. For this reason, the player can easily perform the operation of the effect button 26 controlled to the protruding state based on the second button image.

  When the effect button 26 is operated during the second effective period of the second button effect, an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation is executed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 11H, an effect called cut-in for displaying a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal screen 5 is performed. FIG. 11H illustrates a state in which an effect image different from the case where the operation is performed during the first effective period of the first button effect is displayed. When the operation is performed during the two effective periods, the same effect image as when the operation is performed during the first effective period may be displayed. However, when the first button effect that causes the player to operate the effect button 26 in the normal state and the second button effect that causes the player to operate the effect button 26 in the protruding state are compared, the second button effect is performed. Is characterized in that an operation-corresponding effect suggesting that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively high is easily performed, and that such an operation-corresponding effect is difficult to perform when the first button effect is performed.

  Thus, after the operation corresponding effect is performed according to the button operation during the second effective period of the second button effect, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination. (See FIG. 11I). In addition, although the case where "big hit" is alert | reported is illustrated in FIG.11 (I), "losing" may be alert | reported after operation corresponding effect is performed.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 11, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when reach is established during the decorative symbol variation display, a predetermined reach effect is executed and reach is formed. The effect of changing the design is executed during the reach effect.

  In the conventional pachinko machine 1, after the development to the SP reach production or the SPSP reach production, the SP reach production or the SPSP is performed in a state where the reach design is displayed small in the corner of the screen until the final design is displayed. Reach effects are often executed, and the current situation is that the reach symbols displayed during these reach effects often do not necessarily contribute effectively to the improvement of the effect of reach effects.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reach design changes during the reach production and is used for the production different from the reach production. It is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the production.

  In this embodiment, since the effective period of the first button effect (or second button effect) comes immediately after the reach symbol deformation action described above with reference to FIG. The arrival of the effective period can be grasped in advance based on the start of the change of the reach pattern and the deformation of the reach pattern, and the button operation during the effective period can be easily performed.

  In addition, since the reach design is used for the above-described transformation of the reach design, the button effect (the first button production or the second button production) with the reach design transformation action is performed after the reach is established. Basically it can be done at any time. For this reason, you may make it perform the deformation | transformation action and button production | presentation of reach design, for example during a normal reach production or SP reach production. Moreover, you may make it perform during an increase reach production.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the reach design is finally changed to a button image and developed into a button effect is described. However, in another embodiment, the reach pattern may be changed to another effect image. Good. For example, two reach symbols may be combined and used as a character used for reach production. Further, for example, even if an effect image in which reach symbols are combined is made to collide with the icon displayed in the area 52 and used for an icon change effect that changes the display mode (for example, display color) of the icon. Good. That is, the reach design may be changed to an effect image for changing the icon. Moreover, you may make it change the reach design comprised by the decoration symbols other than 7 designs into the reach design comprised by 7 designs.

  FIG. 12 is a screen diagram illustrating a specific example of the first button effect and the second button effect performed at a timing different from the first button effect and the second button effect described above with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A is a screen diagram illustrating an example of a first button effect that causes the player to operate the effect button 26 in the normal state. FIG. 12B is a screen diagram illustrating an example of a second button effect that causes the player to operate the effect button 26 in the protruding state.

  For example, when the first button effect that causes the player to operate the effect button 26 in the normal state during the SP reach effect is performed, the effect button 26 is controlled to the normal state with the arrival of the first effective period of the first button effect. The normal state suggesting effect is suggested (see FIG. 12A-1). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12A-1, the central portion of the liquid crystal screen 5 on which the button image indicating the effect button 26 in the normal state is displayed emits a little light. There is an effect display that gives the player the impression that some small change will occur in the club.

  When the first effective period of the first button effect comes, the same first button image (button image and gauge image) as described above with reference to FIG. 11D is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (FIG. 12 (A-2)). Then, when the player operates the effect button 26 within the first effective period, an operation corresponding effect is performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 11 (see FIG. 12 (A-3)). FIG. 12 (A-3) shows a state where the same effect as the operation corresponding effect shown in FIG. 11 (E) is performed, but the operation corresponding effect shown in FIG. 11 (H). May be performed, or an operation-related effect different from these operation-related effects may be performed.

  On the other hand, for example, when the second button effect that causes the player to operate the projecting effect button 26 during the SP reach effect is performed, the effect button 26 enters the projecting state with the arrival of the second effective period of the second button effect. A projecting state suggesting effect that suggests being controlled is performed (see FIG. 12B-1). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12B-1, a button image indicating the projecting effect button 26 is displayed, and the central portion of the liquid crystal screen 5 on which the button image is displayed emits intensely and from all sides. An effect display that shows how light gathers in the center is performed, and an effect display that gives the player the impression that something big will change in the center of the screen is performed.

  Then, when the second effective period of the second button effect comes, a second button image (button image and gauge image) similar to that described above with reference to FIG. 11G is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (FIG. 11). 12 (B-2)). Then, when the player operates the effect button 26 within the second effective period, an operation corresponding effect is performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 11 (see FIG. 12 (B-3)). Note that FIG. 12 (B-3) shows a state where the same effect as the operation corresponding effect shown in FIG. 11 (H) is performed, but the operation corresponding effect shown in FIG. 11 (E). The same effect may be performed, or an operation-compatible effect different from these operation-compatible effects may be performed.

  FIG. 12B-2 illustrates a state in which a button image indicating the effect button 26 that has already changed to the protruding state is displayed, but the effect button 26 is normally controlled to a normal state. However, it changes from the normal state to the protruding state with the arrival of the second effective period of the second button effect. For this reason, when the 2nd effective period comes, you may make it perform the state change effect showing a mode that the effect button 26 changes from a normal state to a protrusion state. The same applies to the case where the second button effect described above with reference to FIG.

  Thus, before the production button 26 is controlled to the projecting state, the projecting state suggesting effect (see FIG. 12 (B-1)) suggesting that effect is performed, so that the player can perform the second button effect. It is possible to recognize in advance that the production button 26 is controlled to the protruding state with the arrival of the second effective period. Further, by performing a suggestion effect (in this embodiment, displaying a button image simulating the effect button 26 in the projecting state during the second effective period) that suggests that the effect button 26 is controlled to the protruded state, The player can easily recognize that the effect button 26 is controlled in the protruding state during the second effective period of the second button effect.

  In addition, by performing the normal state suggesting effect illustrated in FIG. 12A-1, the player controls the effect button 26 to the normal state with the arrival of the first effective period of the first button effect. Can be easily recognized. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 12 (A-2), by displaying a button image indicating the effect button 26 in the normal state during the first effective period, the player can obtain the first effective period of the first button effect. It is possible to easily recognize that the production button 26 is controlled to the normal state.

  FIG. 13 is a screen diagram illustrating a specific example of the third button effect and the fourth button effect. In the third button effect, in response to the operation of the effect button 26 in the normal state, the effect button 26 is performed in response to the player's expectation that the effect button 26 changes to the projecting state. This is a button effect that allows the player to operate in the normal state. In the fourth button effect, in response to the operation of the effect button 26 in the normal state, the effect button 26 is changed to the protruding state, and the player's expectation is expressed. It is an effect that the player operates after changing to the protruding state.

  For example, at the predetermined timing during the SP reach effect or during the SPSP reach effect, the normal state suggesting effect is performed as described above based on FIG. 12A-1 (see FIG. 13A). Thereby, the player can recognize in advance that the effect button 26 is controlled to the normal state and the first button image is displayed.

  When a normal state suggestion effect is performed and the third effective period of the third button effect arrives, as shown in FIG. 13B, it is the same as that displayed during the first effective period of the first button effect. The first button image is displayed. However, in the case of the first button effect, if the player does not operate the effect button 26, the first button image continues to be displayed for a maximum of 5 seconds, whereas the first button image in the third button effect is displayed. In this embodiment, the time is 1 second at the longest. This is because the third effective period of the third button effect is divided into the first half effective period and the second half effective period with the non-effective period in between, and the first half effective period is set to 1 second.

  When the third button effect of the third button effect has arrived and the effect button 26 in the normal state is operated in a state where the first button image is displayed or when the first button image is displayed, one second has elapsed from the start of the first half effect period. After the elapse of the first half effective period, an intermediate image illustrated in FIG. 13C is displayed. This intermediate image is an effect image that is displayed during the above-described ineffective period, and is an effect image that enthuses the player's expectation that the effect button 26 changes from the normal state to the protruding state. In the present embodiment, the ineffective period is set to 1 second. For this reason, when the first half effective period expires without operating the production button 26 during the first half effective period, the intermediate image is displayed for 1 second. On the other hand, when the production button 26 is operated during the first half effective period, the remaining time of the first half effective period (= 1 second-time from the start of the first half effective period until the operation is detected) and 1 second are added. An intermediate image is displayed for the time.

  In this embodiment, this intermediate image is realized as an effect of displaying a predetermined character in the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, but the player's expectation that the effect button 26 changes from the normal state to the protruding state. Any effect image may be used as long as it is an effect image that can be played. Note that the operation of the effect button 26 by the player is invalid during the non-valid period in which the intermediate image is displayed. For this reason, even if the player operates the effect button 26 during the ineffective period, the effect according to the operation is not executed, and during the ineffective period, the intermediate image is displayed regardless of the presence or absence of the operation. Will continue.

  Next, when the ineffective period ends and the second half effective period is reached, a third button image is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 as part of the third button effect (see FIG. 13D). This third button image is an effect image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 that is controlled in the normal state, and includes a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the third effective period (here, the second half effective period). This is different from the first button image and the second button image.

  In the third button effect, the first button image is displayed during the first half effective period, and it is already notified that the third effective period of the third button effect has arrived. For this reason, in this embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 13D, the third button image not including the gauge image is displayed in the second half effective period.

  Subsequently, when the player operates the effect button 26 during the second half effective period of the third button effect, an operation corresponding effect similar to the first button effect is performed (see FIGS. 13E and 11E). . FIG. 13 (E) shows a state where the same effect as the operation corresponding effect shown in FIG. 11 (E) is performed, but the operation corresponding effect shown in FIG. 11 (H) is performed. In some cases, an operation corresponding effect different from these operation corresponding effects may be performed.

  Next, for the fourth button effect, effect control similar to the third button effect is performed until the intermediate image is displayed during the non-effective period. The fourth button effect is different from the third button effect in the following points.

  That is, in the fourth button effect, control is performed to change the effect button 26 from the normal state to the protruding state with the arrival of the second half effective period of the fourth button effect. For this reason, when it becomes the latter half effective period of the 4th button production, the 4th button picture illustrated in Drawing 13 (F) is displayed. The fourth button image is an effect image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26 controlled to the protruding state, and is an effect image that simulates the effect button 26 in the protruding state, for example. This fourth button image matches the third button image (see FIG. 13D) in that it does not include a gauge image.

  When the player operates the effect button 26 during the second half effective period of the fourth button effect, an operation corresponding effect similar to the second button effect is performed (see FIGS. 13G and 11H). FIG. 13 (G) shows a state where the same effect as the operation corresponding effect shown in FIG. 11 (H) is performed, but the operation corresponding effect shown in FIG. 11 (E) is performed. In some cases, an operation corresponding effect different from these operation corresponding effects may be performed.

  FIG. 14A is a flowchart illustrating the execution timing of each effect constituting the first button effect. As illustrated in FIG. 14A, a normal state suggesting effect suggesting that the effect button 26 is controlled to a normal state with the arrival of the first effective period when a predetermined time before the first effective period is reached. (See FIG. 12A-1). Note that, as described above with reference to FIGS. 11C and 11D, the reach symbol deformation action may be performed prior to the arrival of the first effective period.

  Thus, when the first effective period of the first button effect comes after the normal state suggestion effect or the reach symbol deformation action is performed, the first button image including the gauge image is displayed (FIG. 11 (D), When the effect button 26 is operated accordingly, an operation corresponding effect is performed (see FIGS. 11E and 12A-3).

  FIG. 14B is a flowchart illustrating the execution timing of each effect constituting the second button effect. As illustrated in FIG. 14 (B), a projecting state suggesting effect suggesting that the effect button 26 is controlled to a projecting state with the arrival of the second effective period when a predetermined time before the second effective period is reached. Is performed (see FIG. 12B-1). Note that, as described above with reference to FIGS. 11C and 11G, a reach symbol deformation action may be performed prior to the arrival of the second effective period.

  As described above, when the second button effect second action period comes after the projecting state suggestion effect or the reach symbol deformation action is performed, the second button image including the gauge image is displayed (FIG. 11G). When the effect button 26 is operated in response to this, an operation-corresponding effect is performed (see FIG. 11 (H) and FIG. 12 (B-3)).

  FIG. 14C is a flowchart illustrating the execution timing of each effect constituting the third button effect. As illustrated in FIG. 14C, when the predetermined time before the third effective period comes, the effect button 26 is controlled to the normal state with the arrival of the first half effective period of the third effective period. The suggesting normal state suggestion effect is performed (see FIG. 13A).

  As described above, when the first half effective period of the third button effect comes after the normal state suggesting effect is performed, the first button image including the gauge image is displayed (see FIG. 13B), and during the first half effective period. When the operation is not performed, the display of the intermediate image (see FIG. 13C) is started simultaneously with the start of the ineffective period (= end of the first half effective period). When an operation is performed during the first half effective period, display of the intermediate image is started at that stage.

  Next, when the ineffective period ends, the display of the intermediate image ends, and the display of the third button image starts with the start of the second half effective period (see FIG. 13D). On the other hand, when the effect button 26 is operated within the second half effective period, an operation corresponding effect (see FIG. 13E) corresponding to the operation is performed.

  FIG. 14D is a flowchart illustrating the execution timing of each effect constituting the fourth button effect. As illustrated in FIG. 14D, when the predetermined time before the fourth effective period comes, the effect button 26 is controlled to the normal state with the arrival of the first half effective period of the fourth effective period. The suggesting normal state suggestion effect is performed (see FIG. 13A).

  As described above, when the first half effective period of the fourth button effect comes after the normal state suggesting effect is performed, the first button image including the gauge image is displayed (see FIG. 13B), and during the first half effective period. When the operation is not performed, the display of the intermediate image (see FIG. 13C) is started simultaneously with the start of the ineffective period (= end of the first half effective period). When an operation is performed during the first half effective period, display of the intermediate image is started at that stage.

  Next, when the ineffective period ends, the display of the intermediate image is also ended, and control for changing the effect button 26 from the normal state to the protruding state is performed with the start of the second half effective period, and the display of the fourth button image is performed. Is started (see FIG. 13F). On the other hand, when the effect button 26 is operated within the second half effective period, an operation corresponding effect (see FIG. 13G) corresponding to the operation is performed.

[About increased reach production]
Hereinafter, a specific example of the increase reach effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17. Here, FIG. 15 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the two-line reach effect. 16 and 17 are screen views showing specific examples of the three-line reach effect.

  As illustrated in FIG. 15A, for example, when the three decorative symbols are stopped in a display manner indicating reach loss in the final stage of the normal reach production, as described above with reference to FIG. There is a case.

(2-line reach production)
When developing from a normal reach production (the short reach production described above) to an increased reach production, for example, the middle symbols that are pseudo-stopped (9 symbols in the example shown in FIG. 15A) are restarted without stopping. . In the present embodiment, as the effect that the middle symbol is restarted, the effect display that fades out so as to be sucked into the back of the screen while the pseudo symbol that has been pseudo-stopped becomes smaller is performed (see FIG. 15B).

  When the middle symbol disappears from the liquid crystal screen 5, as described above, first, an increased screaming effect (not shown) is given to raise the player's expectation that the reach symbol and the effective line will increase. When the two-line reach effect is performed, the reach symbol and the effective line are increased after the increased turn effect is performed. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 15B, a reach is formed by 8 symbols (8 symbols on the left) pseudo-stopped in the left column and 8 symbols (8 symbols on the right) pseudo-stopped in the right column. In the case where the left 8 symbol is reduced, the left 8 symbol is moved upward, and the right 8 symbol is similarly reduced while moving downward (see FIGS. 15B and 15C). Along with this, 7 symbols (7 symbols on the left) that are 1 smaller than 8 symbols appear in the space immediately below the 8 symbols on the left, and 7 symbols that are 1 smaller than 8 symbols on the space immediately above the 8 symbols on the right. (Right 7 symbols) appears. As a result, the reach symbol and the effective line are both increased to two (see FIG. 15C).

  FIG. 15C illustrates a state in which the reach symbol and the effective line are increased to two, but the reach symbol and the effective line may be increased to three (see FIG. 16D). In addition, although not shown in the figure, the reach design and the effective line may not increase even if it is developed to increase reach production.

  FIG. 15C illustrates a state in which a decorative symbol that is one smaller than the first reach symbol (here, eight symbols) is increased, but a decorative symbol that is one larger than the first reach symbol is increased. There are also patterns. That is, regarding the two-line reach effect, for example, when two eight symbols are initially displayed as reach symbols, two seven symbols are additionally displayed as reach symbols, and the reach symbol and the number of effective lines are set to “2”. There are an increasing pattern and a pattern in which two nine symbols are additionally displayed as reach symbols, and the reach symbol and the number of effective lines increase to “2”. In addition, when there are a plurality of selectable patterns, for example, a random number is used to increase a decorative symbol that is one smaller than the first reach symbol or increase a decorative symbol that is one larger than the first reach symbol. It is possible to decide by lottery.

  However, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of symbol variation is “big hit”, it is stopped and displayed in order to finally notify “big hit” in a plurality of reach symbols. It is necessary to include a decorative pattern. For this reason, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, a process for selecting one of the combinations of reach symbols including the same reach symbol as the jackpot symbol is selected by lottery. In this way, it is determined whether to increase the reach symbol.

  For example, when 4 symbols are finally stopped and “big hit” is notified, the first reach symbol is 4 symbols, and a pattern in which 1 smaller 3 symbols are additionally displayed and 1 larger 5 symbols. If a pattern to be additionally displayed is prepared, either pattern can be selected. Therefore, in such a case, a lottery using a random number is performed to select one of the patterns.

  On the other hand, for example, when 4 symbols are finally stopped and “big hit” is notified, the first reach symbol is 5 symbols, and a pattern in which 1 symbol is additionally displayed and 1 larger 6 When a pattern for additionally displaying symbols is prepared, if the latter pattern is selected, the reach symbol does not include the jackpot symbol (here, four symbols). Therefore, in such a case, the former pattern (a pattern for additionally displaying four symbols) is inevitably selected.

  In addition, what has been described here is the same for the case of notifying “losing” as a result of the two-line reach effect, and when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing” The reach pattern increasing pattern that includes the reach symbol forming the reach-missing eye is always selected.

  When the reach symbol and the effective line are increased to two, the above-mentioned symbol alignment effect is performed for the symbol alignment of the first line. In the example shown in FIG. 15C, there are two types of reach symbols, 7 symbols and 8 symbols, and the decorative symbol with the smaller number is 7 symbols. For this reason, as a design uniform production effect for the first effective line, a digital production effect that speaks the 7 design alignment is performed. Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 15C and 15D, the left 7 symbol and right 7 symbol are enlarged, the left 8 symbol and right 8 symbol are reduced, and the reach symbol is displayed in the middle row. An effect display in which the same seven symbols descend at a low speed is performed. Then, when the variation production pattern that the first line is not aligned is selected, the middle 7 symbols pass through the effective line without stopping on the effective line, and fade out so as to be sucked into the back of the screen while becoming smaller. An effect display is performed (see FIG. 15E).

  In addition, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” and the variation effect pattern that matches the symbols is selected in the first line, it is not shown in FIG. The middle 7 symbols stop on the effective line of the eye, and “big hit” is notified. In this case, the symbol alignment effect for the second effective line is not performed, and the two-line reach effect ends. As described above, whether the two-line reach effect is ended by the first symbol matching effect or the two-line reach effect is ended by the second symbol effect is a variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol. To be determined.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 15 (E), when the same middle symbol as the reach symbol does not stop on the first effective line, the symbol squeezing effect is performed to strike the second line of symbols. Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 15E and 15F, the left 7 symbol and right 7 symbol forming the first reach symbol are reduced and the second reach symbol is formed. The left 8 symbol and the right 8 symbol are expanded, and an effect display is performed in which the same 8 symbols as the second reach symbol descend at a low speed in the middle row. And when the variation production pattern that the second line does not have the same pattern is set, the middle 8 symbols pass through the effective line without stopping on the effective line, and fade out so that it is sucked into the back of the screen while becoming small The effect display is performed (see FIG. 15G).

  In this way, when the symbols are not aligned even on the last active line, the first reach symbol is erased from the screen, and the symbol 9 next to the 8 symbols faded out appears in the middle row. The reach losing eye including the second reach symbol (here, the left 8 symbol and the right 8 symbol) is falsely stopped (see FIG. 15 (H)), and finally these decorative symbols are completely stopped. Loss is notified (see FIG. 15I). 15 (H) and (I) illustrate how the 9 symbols that advance one frame between the 8 symbols that are the second reach symbols are stopped and the loss is reported. A middle symbol (here, seven symbols) that is one smaller than the reach symbol may be stopped in the middle row to notify the loss.

(3 line reach production)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, a specific example of a three-line reach effect in which the reach symbol and the effective line are increased to three will be described.

  The flow of production until the reach symbol increases is the same as that of the 2-line reach production, but in brief, three rows of decorations in a display mode showing reach loss at the end of the normal reach production (short reach production in this embodiment). The symbol is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 16 (A)), and subsequently, an effect display that fades out so as to be sucked into the back of the screen while the middle symbol (for example, middle five symbols) that has been pseudo-stopped becomes small is performed (Fig. 16 (B)).

  When the middle symbol disappears from the liquid crystal screen 5, an increased turning effect is performed as in the case where the two-line reach effect is performed, and the reach symbol and the effective line increase to “2”. For example, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the reach is formed by the left 4 symbols and the right 4 symbols that are pseudo-stopped, the left 4 symbols move upward while being reduced, and the right 4 symbols Move in a similar manner while being reduced (see FIGS. 16B and 16C). Along with this, 3 symbols 1 smaller than 4 symbols appear in the space immediately below the 4 symbols on the left, and 3 symbols 1 smaller than 4 symbols appear in the space immediately above the 4 symbols on the right (Fig. 16 (C)).

  When the three-line reach effect is performed, after the reach symbol and the effective line are increased to “2”, the second increase effect is performed, and the reach symbol and the effective line are increased to “3”. Specifically, for example, as illustrated in FIGS. 16C and 16D, the left 4 symbol and the left 3 symbol move upward while being reduced, and the right 4 symbol and the right 3 symbol are small. Move downwards. As a result, two symbols that are one smaller than the three symbols appear in the space immediately below the left three symbols, and two symbols that are one smaller than the three symbols appear in the space immediately above the right three symbols. As a result, the reach symbol and the effective line are both increased to three (see FIG. 16D).

  FIG. 16 shows an example in which a reach symbol that is one smaller than the first reach symbol and a reach symbol that is two smaller than the first reach symbol are increased, but the reach symbols are additionally displayed in other patterns. Sometimes it is done. Specifically, a reach symbol that is one larger than the first reach symbol and a reach symbol that is two larger than the first reach symbol may be additionally displayed. In addition, a reach symbol that is one smaller than the first reach symbol and a reach symbol that is one larger than the first reach symbol may be additionally displayed. For this reason, when there are a plurality of selectable patterns, it can be determined by lottery using random numbers, for example.

  However, in the same manner as described above with regard to the two-line reach production, the reach that constitutes the jackpot symbol or the losing symbol at the time of notification for both the case of notifying “big hit” and the case of notifying “lost” The symbol must be included in one of the three reach symbols. For this reason, when there are a plurality of patterns in which the reach symbols are additionally displayed so as to include the same reach symbols as the reach symbols that are stopped and displayed at the time of notification, one of these patterns is selected by lottery, for example. On the other hand, when there is only one pattern in which the reach symbol is additionally displayed so as to include the same reach symbol as the reach symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of notification, the pattern is inevitably selected.

  When the three-line reach effect is performed, the reach symbol and the effective line increase to three as a result of the two-time increase effect. As described above, when the reach symbol and the number of effective lines increase to three, a symbol alignment effect is performed for the symbol alignment of the first line. In the example shown in FIG. 16D, there are three types of reach symbols: 4 symbols, 3 symbols, and 2 symbols, of which 2 symbols are the smallest, and 3 symbols are the next smallest. . For this reason, when a pattern for notifying the winning is selected in the third pattern matching effect by performing the symbol matching effect for the third time, for example, in the order of 2 symbols, 3 symbols, and 4 symbols. There will be a squealing effect to make the match.

  First, as illustrated in FIG. 16 (E), the left 2 symbols and the right 2 symbols are expanded, and the left 3 symbols, left 4 symbols, right 3 symbols, and right The 4 symbols are reduced, and an effect display is performed in which the same 2 symbols as the first reach symbol descend at a low speed in the middle row. Then, when a variation production pattern is set in which the first line is not aligned, the middle two symbols pass through the effective line without stopping on the effective line, and fade out so as to be sucked into the back of the screen while becoming smaller. An effect display is performed (see FIG. 16F).

  In addition, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, and the pattern that performs the symbol matching effect only once and notifies “big hit” is selected, the pattern shown in FIG. After the effect display is performed, the middle two symbols stop on the active line, and “big hit” is notified.

  On the other hand, if a pattern that performs the pattern matching production effect more than once with respect to the three-line reach production is selected, the second line after the symbol matching production effect indicating that the first line did not become the symbol matching is performed. There will be a production of the symbol matching. Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 16 (F) and (G), the left 3 symbol and right 3 symbol forming the second reach symbol are enlarged and the first and third symbols are enlarged. The left 2 symbol, right 2 symbol, left 4 symbol, and right 4 symbol forming the reach symbol are reduced, and an effect display is performed in which the same 3 symbols as the second reach symbol descend at a low speed in the middle row. When a variation effect pattern is set in which the second line is not aligned, an effect display that fades out so that the middle three symbols are sucked into the back of the screen while being reduced without stopping on the effective line is performed. (See FIG. 16H).

  In the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, and the pattern matching ringing effect is performed twice and the pattern for notifying “big hit” in the second symbol matching ringing effect is selected. After the effect display of FIG. 16 (G) is performed, the middle three symbols stop on the active line and “big hit” is notified.

  On the other hand, when the pattern for performing the three-line reach effect for the three-line reach effect is selected, the third line of the pattern is aligned after the second line is performed. There will be a line-up of patterns that will be used to sing. Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 16 (H) and (I), the left 4 symbols and the right 4 symbols forming the third reach symbol are enlarged, and the first and second symbols are enlarged. The left 2 symbol, right 2 symbol, left 3 symbol, and right 3 symbol forming the reach symbol are reduced, and an effect display in which the same 4 symbols as the third reach symbol descend at a low speed in the middle row is performed. Then, when a variation effect pattern that matches the symbols is set on the third line, that is, three lines that are judged as “big hit” at the start of symbol variation and notify “big hit” at the third symbol matching effect When the production pattern of reach production is selected, the middle four symbols stop between the left four symbols and the right four symbols (see FIG. 17A). Then, the first and second reach symbols that do not have the same pattern are erased from the screen, and the blue eyes including the third reach symbol are pseudo-stopped (FIGS. 17A and 17B). Eventually, these decorative symbols are completely stopped and the jackpot is notified (see FIG. 17C). When the jackpot is notified in this way, a predetermined opening effect is started with the start of the opening period of the jackpot game (see FIG. 17D).

  In addition, when it is determined that the game is “lost” at the start of the symbol variation and the third line reach production pattern in which “lost” is notified in the third design uniform production production is selected, the third reach design is selected. The same decorative design passes through the effective line without stopping on the effective line, and the effect display that fades out so that it is sucked into the back of the screen while being reduced is performed, finally reach losing eyes are displayed, "Will be notified.

  Up to here, the case where the short reach effect is once performed after the reach is established and the case of developing to the two-line reach effect or the three-line reach effect has been described as an example. As described above, after reaching reach, there is a case where it directly develops to increase reach production without going through normal reach production.

  Further, in the present embodiment, with respect to the two-line reach effect that is determined as “big hit”, the effect pattern in which the symbol match-up effect is performed only once and the “jackpot” is notified in the symbol set-up effect, It is possible to select an effect pattern in which “hit” is notified in the second symbol matching effect by performing the symbol matching effect twice. In addition, with regard to the 3-line reach production, a design pattern production effect is performed only once, and a “big hit” notification is given in the design production method, and a second design design is performed. It is possible to select an effect pattern in which “hit” is notified in the uniform production effect, and an effect pattern in which “hit” is notified in the third design matching production effect that is performed three times.

  On the other hand, in the other embodiments, the two-line reach production is always performed twice, and the second pattern-match production effect is notified, and the winning is notified in the second pattern-alignment production, and the three-line reach production is always 3 You may employ | adopt the structure of notifying the winning in the 3rd time of the symbol matching production effect by performing the symbol matching production effect of the first time.

(About the reliability of reach production)
FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating an example of the variation pattern selection table. A main ROM 102 (see FIG. 57) of the game control board 100, which will be described later, stores a variation pattern selection table that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol. Regarding the first special symbol determination, the main ROM 102 includes a big hit variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18B), a reach variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18A), and a loss variation pattern selection table. It is remembered. The jackpot variation pattern selection table is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is determined as “big hit”. The reach variation pattern selection table is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is determined to be “losing” and it is determined to perform the reach effect. The variation pattern selection table for losing is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern of the first special symbol when it is determined as “losing” and it is determined that the reach effect is not performed.

  As exemplified in FIG. 18A, in the reach variation pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is associated with the variation pattern random number. In FIG. 18, for convenience of explanation, in addition to the variation pattern and variation pattern random number, the variation time of the first special symbol, the type of variation effect pattern selected for each variation pattern, and the specific variation effect pattern The contents of the effect, the range that the variation pattern random number can take, and the ratio at which each variation pattern is selected are also shown.

  As will be described in detail later, when the main CPU 101 (see FIG. 57) of the game control board 100 determines “lost” in the first special symbol determination and determines to execute the reach effect, the main CPU 101 acquires the fluctuation pattern random number Stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 103. Then, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number is read from the reach variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18A), thereby selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, in order to facilitate the explanation, the range that the fluctuation pattern random number can take is set to “0” to “99”. For example, if the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “0” to “21”, the main CPU 101 reads the variation pattern A from the variation pattern selection table for reach, thereby varying the variation pattern as the variation pattern of the first special symbol. Select A. For example, if the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “55” to “61”, the variation pattern E is read as the variation pattern of the first special symbol by reading the variation pattern E from the variation pattern selection table for reach. select.

  In the reach variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 18A, since 22 random numbers from “0” to “21” are assigned to the variation pattern A, the rate at which the variation pattern A is selected. Is 22% (= 22/100). In addition, since 13 random numbers “22” to “34” are assigned to the variation pattern B, the rate at which the variation pattern B is selected is 13% (= 13/100). In addition, since 11 random numbers “35” to “45” are assigned to the variation pattern C, the rate at which the variation pattern C is selected is 11% (= 11/100). In addition, since nine random numbers “46” to “54” are assigned to the variation pattern D, the rate at which the variation pattern D is selected is 9% (= 9/100).

  In addition, since seven random numbers “55” to “61” are assigned to the variation pattern E, the rate of selection of the variation pattern E is 7% (= 7/100). In addition, since five random numbers “62” to “66” are assigned to the variation pattern F, the rate at which the variation pattern F is selected is 5% (= 5/100). In addition, since two random numbers “67” to “69” are assigned to the variation pattern G, the rate at which the variation pattern G is selected is 2% (= 2/100).

  As described above, in the variation pattern selection table for reach, it is easy to select a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time of the first special symbol, as is clear from the comparison of the ratios at which each variation pattern is selected. It can be said that there is a tendency that a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time of the first special symbol is difficult to be selected. In addition, regarding the effects corresponding to each variation pattern, it can be said that the normal reach effect and the increase reach effect are easily selected, and conversely, the SPSP reach effect and the SP reach effect tend to be difficult to select.

  On the other hand, when it is determined as “big hit” in the first special symbol determination, the random number of the variation pattern is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 as in the case of the loss. Then, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number is read from the big hit variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 18B), whereby the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected.

  For example, if the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “0” to “1”, the variation pattern H is read from the variation pattern selection table for jackpot and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected as the variation pattern H. Is done. For example, if the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “2” to “5”, the variation pattern I is read out from the jackpot variation pattern selection table, and the variation pattern I of the first special symbol is the variation pattern I. Selected. For example, if the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “6” to “11”, the variation pattern J is read from the variation pattern selection table for jackpot, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the variation pattern J. Selected. For example, if the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “12” to “19”, the variation pattern K is read out from the jackpot variation pattern selection table, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the variation pattern K. Selected.

  For example, if the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “20” to “29”, the variation pattern L is read from the big hit variation pattern selection table, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the variation pattern L. Selected. For example, if the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “30” to “44”, the variation pattern M is read from the variation pattern selection table for jackpot, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the variation pattern M. Selected. For example, if the obtained variation pattern random number is any one of “45” to “69”, the variation pattern N is read out from the jackpot variation pattern selection table, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is the variation pattern N. Selected.

  In the jackpot variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 18B, since two random numbers “0” to “1” are assigned to the variation pattern H, the rate at which the variation pattern H is selected. Is 2% (= 2/100). In addition, since four random numbers “2” to “5” are assigned to the variation pattern I, the rate at which the variation pattern I is selected is 4% (= 4/100). In addition, since six random numbers “6” to “11” are assigned to the variation pattern J, the rate at which the variation pattern J is selected is 6% (= 6/100). In addition, since eight random numbers “12” to “19” are assigned to the variation pattern K, the rate at which the variation pattern K is selected is 8% (= 8/100).

  Further, since ten random numbers “20” to “29” are assigned to the variation pattern L, the ratio of the variation pattern L being selected is 7% (= 7/100). In addition, since 15 random numbers “30” to “44” are assigned to the variation pattern M, the rate at which the variation pattern M is selected is 15% (= 15/100). In addition, since 25 random numbers “45” to “69” are assigned to the variation pattern N, the rate at which the variation pattern N is selected is 25% (= 25/100).

  In this way, in the variation pattern selection table for jackpots, it is easy to select a variation pattern with a relatively long variation time of the first special symbol, as is clear from the comparison of the ratios at which each variation pattern is selected. It can be said that there is a tendency that a variation pattern having a relatively short variation time of the first special symbol is difficult to select. In addition, regarding the effects corresponding to each variation pattern, it can be said that the SPSP reach effect and the SP reach effect are easily selected, and the normal reach effect and the increase reach effect tend to be difficult to select.

  Further, when the reach variation pattern selection table and the jackpot variation pattern selection table are compared, the following can be said. That is, the SPSP reach effect and the SP reach effect are easily selected in the jackpot variation pattern selection table that is referred to in the case of “big hit” (see the variation patterns L to N in FIG. 18B). In the reach variation pattern selection table referenced in this case, it is difficult to select the SPSP reach effect or the SP reach effect (see the variation patterns E to G in FIG. 18A). From this, when the SPSP reach production or the SP reach production is executed, it is easy to finally reach the jackpot, and it can be said that the SPSP reach production or the SP reach production is a reach production with relatively high reliability for the jackpot. .

  Further, it is difficult to select an increase reach effect or a normal reach effect in the jackpot variation pattern selection table that is referred to in the case of “big hit” (see the variation patterns H to K in FIG. 18B). In the reach variation pattern selection table referred to in this case, the increase reach effect or the normal reach effect is easily selected (see the variation patterns A to D in FIG. 18A). From this, when the increase reach effect or the normal reach effect is executed, it is difficult to finally reach the jackpot, and it can be said that the increase reach effect or the normal reach effect is a reach effect with relatively low reliability for the jackpot. In other words, it can be said that the increase reach effect and the normal reach effect are reach effects with lower reliability for the jackpot than the SPSP reach effect and the SP reach effect.

  When the reach effects are arranged in descending order of reliability for the jackpot, the order is SPSP reach effect, SP reach effect, increased reach effect, and normal reach effect.

  In addition, the following can be said about the increase reach production. That is, as is clear from the reach variation pattern selection table of FIG. 18A, with regard to the increase reach effect selected when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, the increase reach of one line. The production is most easily selected and the next easy to select is the 2-line incremental reach production, and the 3-line incremental reach production is the least likely to be selected. On the other hand, as is clear from the jackpot variation pattern selection table of FIG. 18B, the increase reach effect selected when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “hit” is an increase reach of 3 lines. The production is most easily selected, and the next easy to select is the 2-line incremental reach production, and the one-line incremental reach production is the least likely to be selected. From these facts, it can be said that the smaller the number of reach symbols and effective lines, the lower the reliability for the jackpot, and conversely, the higher the number of reach symbols and effective lines, the higher the reliability for the jackpot.

(7 symbol reliability)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the main CPU 101 executes the first special symbol determination, information indicating the determination result is transmitted to the effect control board 130. On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets the decoration effect change effect pattern and the notice effect pattern of each notice effect, and the effects according to the set contents are the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board. 150.

  In such a flow of processing, the sub CPU 131 is a decorative symbol that forms a reach with reference to the reach symbol selection table in the variable effect pattern selection processing (FIGS. 77 to 79) for selecting the variable symbol pattern of the decorative symbol. Select a reach design.

  19 and 20 are diagrams illustrating an example of a reach symbol selection table used for processing for selecting a reach symbol.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a lose reach symbol selection table that is referred to in order to determine the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, for example, the reach effect is executed in a state where the same decorative design as the left design and the right design is aligned on the active line, and the same decorative design as the reach design is stopped in the middle row While “big hit” is notified, “losing” is notified by stopping a decorative symbol different from the reach symbol in the middle row. The above “final reach symbol” means the reach symbol displayed on the active line immediately before the “big hit” or “lost” is notified.

  The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol. If the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “lost”, the sub CPU 131 loses the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number. The final reach design is selected by reading from the reach design selection table.

  As illustrated in FIG. 19, in the reach design selection table for losing, the final reach effect that is performed immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (in FIG. 19). The final reach design and the random value are associated with each other. Here, the final reach effect is a reach effect that is performed immediately before the decorative symbol is fully stopped in a display mode indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination. For example, when the SP reach production is performed after the reach is established, the SPSP reach production is developed, and when the winning is notified at the end of the SPSP reach production, the SPSP reach production corresponds to the final reach production. Further, for example, when only the increase reach effect is performed after the reach is established and the winning is notified at the end of the increase reach effect, the increase reach effect corresponds to the final reach effect. In the present embodiment, the range that the reach symbol selection random number can take is set to “0” to “99”.

  As illustrated in FIG. 19, with respect to the normal reach effect that is single line reach, random numbers are not assigned to the 3 symbols and 9 symbols. This will be described in detail later on the basis of FIG. 21 and subsequent drawings. If the three symbols are pseudo-stopped, there is a possibility of developing into a pseudo-continuous notice effect called a “three symbol pseudo-ream” (see FIG. 28). This is because when the 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped on the active line, the reach is not established but the 9 symbols roulette effect (see FIG. 40) is developed. In this embodiment, the 3 reach or 9 A configuration is employed in which the final reach effect is not performed in a state where the symbol is displayed as the final reach symbol. On the other hand, 16 random numbers “0” to “15” are assigned to one symbol, and 16 random values “16” to “31” are assigned to two symbols. . Also, 18 random numbers from “32” to “49” are assigned to 4 symbols, and 16 random values from “50” to “65” are assigned to 5 symbols. . In addition, 16 random numbers “66” to “81” are assigned to 6 symbols, and 2 random values “82” to “83” are assigned to 7 symbols. , 8 random numbers of “84” to “99” are assigned to 8 symbols.

  For this reason, the 3 and 9 designs are not selected as the final reach design for the normal reach production, and the rate at which 1 design, 2 designs, 5 designs, 6 designs, or 8 designs are selected is 16% ( = 16/100), and the rate at which the four symbols are selected is 18% (= 18/100). The ratio of 7 symbols selected is 2% (= 2/100).

  Regarding the 3 line reach production of the increase reach production, for the combination of 1 design to 3 designs that the final reach design is 3 designs and the combination of 7 designs to 9 designs that the final reach design is 9 designs As with the above-described normal reach production, no random value is assigned. On the other hand, 20 random numbers “0” to “19” are assigned to combinations of 2 symbols to 4 symbols in which the final reach symbol is 4 symbols. Also, 20 random numbers from “20” to “39” are assigned to combinations of 3 symbols to 5 symbols in which the final reach symbol is 5 symbols. In addition, 20 random numbers “40” to “59” are assigned to combinations of 4 symbols to 6 symbols in which the final reach symbol is 6 symbols. Also, 20 random numbers from “60” to “79” are assigned to combinations of 5 symbols to 7 symbols in which the final reach symbol is 7 symbols. Further, 20 random numbers from “80” to “99” are assigned to combinations of 6 symbols to 8 symbols in which the final reach symbol is 8 symbols.

  For this reason, the combination of the reach design where the final reach symbol is any of 4 symbols to 8 symbols while the combination of reach symbols where the final reach symbol is 3 symbols or 9 symbols is not selected. In the present embodiment, all are 20% (= 20/100).

  In addition, as described above, when the “line loss” is notified by performing the three-line reach effect, first, the two-time increase effect is performed, and thereafter, the three-time pattern effect effect is always performed. “Lose” is notified in the design matching production of “No.”. In this way, since the reach pattern is increased by 2 in the 3-line reach production, when the final reach design of the 3-line reach production is determined, how the reach design is produced by the 2-line increase production of the 3-line reach production. Whether to increase is selected. For example, when the final reach design of the 3-line reach production is 4 designs, the combination of the 3 reach designs is 2 designs, 3 designs, and 4 designs. In this case, a pattern matching effect for the first effective line is performed with 2 symbols displayed on the active line, and then a symbol for the second effective line with 3 symbols displayed on the active line. A uniform pattern production effect is performed, and finally, with the four symbols displayed on the active line, a third pattern is displayed for the third effective line. In this final pattern uniform production effect, the middle symbol is different from the four symbols. Stops on the active line, and “losing” is notified.

  For the combinations of the above-mentioned 2 designs, 3 designs, and 4 designs, it is possible to increase the reach design by a plurality of increase patterns as follows. The first increase pattern is a pattern in which 3 symbols and 4 symbols are additionally displayed as reach symbols when the reach symbol that has been pseudo-stopped at the end of the short reach effect (normal reach effect) is 2 symbols. The second increase pattern is a pattern in which 2 symbols and 4 symbols are additionally displayed as reach symbols when the reach symbol that has been pseudo-stopped at the end of the short reach effect (normal reach effect) is 3 symbols. The third increase pattern is a pattern in which 2 symbols and 3 symbols are additionally displayed as reach symbols when the reach symbol that has been pseudo-stopped at the end of the short reach effect (normal reach effect) is 4 symbols. As described above, when three reach designs of 2 designs, 3 designs, and 4 designs are displayed and a 3-line reach effect is performed, it is possible to increase the reach design with the above three types of increase patterns. . For this reason, when 4 symbols are selected as the final reach symbols, for example, a lottery using a random number is performed to select one of the three types of increase patterns. Thereby, the production pattern of the twice increase production effect of 3 line reach production is determined.

  It should be noted that, by selecting the increase pattern, a reach symbol that is pseudo-stopped at the end of the short reach effect and two reach symbols that are additionally displayed for this reach symbol are determined. For this reason, in the case of developing from the short reach effect to the three-line reach effect, the reach pattern during the short reach effect is inevitably determined by selecting the increase pattern.

  Although the method for determining the reach pattern increase pattern for the 3-line reach effect has been described here, the increase pattern is similarly selected for the 2-line reach effect only by the number of reach symbols to be increased.

  Further, as illustrated in FIG. 19, regarding the SPSP reach effect which is single line reach, random numbers are not assigned to the 3 symbols and 9 symbols. This is the same as the normal reach production. On the other hand, 14 random numbers from “0” to “13” are assigned to one symbol, and 16 random values from “14” to “29” are assigned to two symbols. . In addition, 16 random numbers “30” to “45” are assigned to 4 symbols, and 14 random values “46” to “59” are assigned to 5 symbols. . In addition, 16 random values of “60” to “75” are assigned to 6 symbols, and 10 random values of “76” to “85” are assigned to 7 symbols. , 8 random numbers from “86” to “99” are assigned to 8 symbols.

  For this reason, with regard to SPSP reach production, 3 symbols and 9 symbols are not selected as the final reach symbols, and the ratio of selecting 1 symbol, 5 symbols, or 8 symbols is 14% (= 14/100). The ratio at which 2 symbols, 4 symbols, or 6 symbols are selected is 16% (= 16/100). And the ratio by which 7 symbols are selected is 10% (= 10/100).

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a jackpot reach symbol selection table that is referred to in order to determine the final reach symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big jackpot”. Here, the final reach symbol means the reach symbol displayed on the active line immediately before the three decorative symbols stop to make a “big hit” notification. For example, when the SPSP reach effect is performed in a state where two 6 symbols are displayed as reach symbols on the active line at the end of the SPSP reach effect, the final reach symbol is 6 symbols. In addition, for example, a three-line reach effect is executed in a state in which three types of reach symbols of three symbols, four symbols, and five symbols are displayed, and three three symbols are aligned on the effective line in the first symbol matching effect. If the “big hit” is notified, the final reach symbol is three symbols.

  The sub CPU 131 acquires a reach symbol selection random number when selecting the final reach symbol, and if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, the sub reach 131 wins the final reach symbol corresponding to the reach symbol selection random number. The final reach design is selected by reading from the reach design selection table.

  As illustrated in FIG. 20, the jackpot reach symbol selection table has the same configuration as the lose reach symbol selection table, but is different in the remaining portions.

  As for the normal reach production which is single line reach, the random number value assigned to 7 symbols increases by 2 and the random value assigned to 4 symbols decreases by 2 when compared with the lose reach design selection table. ing. For this reason, the ratio at which 7 symbols are selected increases from 2% to 4%, and the ratio at which 4 symbols are selected decreases from 18% to 16%.

  On the other hand, regarding the 3 line reach production, in the present embodiment, the allocation of random numbers is the same as that for the lose reach design selection table for each of 3 to 8 symbols that can be the final reach design.

  For example, when a three-line reach effect is performed as a final reach effect to notify “big hit”, a case where a three-line reach effect is performed as a final reach effect and “losing” is notified is a three-line reach effect pattern. The decision method is different. For this reason, the determination method of the production pattern of the former 3 line reach production is demonstrated below.

  When the “big hit” is notified in the final stage of the three-line reach effect, the two-time increase effect is performed, and the reach symbol and the effective line are increased to three. The increase in the reach symbol and the effective line is the same as the case where “losing” is notified at the end of the three-line reach production.

  In addition, when “big hit” is notified at the end of the three-line reach production, the symbol matching production effect is always performed three times, and “losing” is notified in the third symbol matching production effect. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the “big hit” at the end of the 3-line reach production, the same pattern as the reach pattern is displayed on the effective line in the pattern-alignment production only once. The pattern to be stopped, the pattern matching production effect performed twice, and the second pattern matching production effect, the pattern that stops the same decorative design as the reach symbol on the effective line, and the pattern matching treatment production performed three times It is possible to select any one of the three patterns, that is, the pattern that stops the same decorative design as the reach design on the effective line.

  More specifically, for example, when 4 symbols are selected as the final reach symbols for the 3-line reach production, any of the three patterns illustrated in FIG. 20 can be selected. In the first pattern, three reach symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, and 6 symbols, are displayed after increasing the number of strokes, and the symbols are aligned with 4 symbols displayed as reach symbols on the effective line. This is a pattern in which an effect is performed and the middle 4 symbols are stopped on the active line in this symbol matching effect, and “big hit” is notified. In the second pattern, three reach symbols of 3 symbols, 4 symbols, and 5 symbols are displayed through two incremental production effects, and the first pattern is displayed with 3 symbols displayed as reach symbols on the active line. Perform a pattern matching effect, then perform a second symbol alignment effect with 4 symbols displayed as reach symbols on the active line. In this second pattern alignment effect, the middle 4 symbols are displayed on the active line. This is a pattern for stopping and reporting “big hit”. In the third pattern, three reach designs, 2 designs, 3 designs, and 4 designs, are displayed after 2 increase production effects, and the 2nd design is displayed on the effective line as the reach design. Performing the pattern matching effect, then performing the second pattern matching effect with 3 symbols displayed on the active line as the reach symbol, and finally displaying 3 symbols as the reach symbol on the active line. This is a pattern in which the second symbol matching effect is performed, and in the third symbol matching effect, the middle four symbols are stopped on the active line to notify “big hit”.

  As described above, when “losing” is notified by the three-line reach effect, there is only one type of pattern matching effect, whereas when “big hit” is notified by the three-line reach effect, the symbols are aligned. There are three types of squealing effects. For this reason, when the final reach symbol is selected, it is selected in which pattern of the three types the “big hit” is to be notified, in other words, in what number of symbol matching rounding effects the “big hit” is to be notified. Is done. This selection process determines the combination of the three reach symbols and how many times the symbol matching effect is to be notified (that is, how many times the symbol matching effect is performed).

  As for the 3-line reach production, for example, it is assumed that the final reach symbol is 4 symbols, and that 3 symbols, 4 symbols, and 5 symbols are selected as a combination of the 3 reach symbols. In this case, as a way to increase the reach design, 4 symbols and 5 designs are additionally displayed from the state where 3 symbols are pseudo-stopped at the end of the short reach production, and 4 symbols are pseudo-stopped at the end of the short reach production. Three patterns can be selected: a pattern that additionally displays 3 symbols and 5 symbols from the state, and a pattern that additionally displays 3 symbols and 4 symbols from the state where 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped at the end of the short reach production. Such an increase in reach design is the same as the case of notifying “losing” by performing a 3-line reach effect, and in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 19, it is simulated at the end of the short reach effect. The reach symbol to be stopped and the combination of two reach symbols added to the reach symbol are determined together.

  By the way, as illustrated in FIG. 20, regarding the three-line reach, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the final reach symbols is set to the same rate except for the three symbols and the nine symbols. In addition, when the final reach symbol is selected, the number of combinations of three reach symbols, how many times the symbol alignment effect is performed, the reach pattern of reach symbols, the reach pattern of short reach effects, etc. are determined by lottery using random numbers. Is done. From this, it can be said that regarding the increase reach production, the reliability for the jackpot is the same regardless of the combination of the three reach symbols.

  On the other hand, regarding the SPSP reach production which is a single line reach, the allocation of random numbers for each reach symbol is different from the reach reach symbol selection table except for a part (3 symbols and 9 symbols). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 20, twelve random numbers “0” to “11” are assigned to one symbol, and “12” to “23” are assigned to two symbols. 12 random number values are assigned. In addition, 12 random values of “24” to “35” are assigned to 4 symbols, and 12 random values of “36” to “47” are assigned to 5 symbols. . In addition, 12 random numbers “48” to “59” are assigned to 6 symbols, and 10 random values “90” to “99” are assigned to 8 symbols. . 30 random numbers from “60” to “89” are assigned to the 7 symbols.

  For this reason, with regard to SPSP reach production, 3 symbols and 9 symbols are not selected as final reach symbols, and the ratio of 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, or 6 symbols being selected is 12%. (= 12/100), and the rate at which 8 symbols are selected is 10% (= 10/100). And the ratio by which 7 symbols are selected is 30% (= 30/100).

  For this reason, the following can be said from the description so far based on FIG. 19 and FIG. That is, when it is relatively unlikely that the jackpot will be notified, specifically, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing” and the variation time of the first special symbol is relative. When the time is set to a short time (when a variation pattern with a relatively short variation time of the first special symbol is selected), normal reach production is performed in a state where the reach symbol is composed of a decorative symbol different from the seven symbols. It can be said that it is easy to execute. This is clear from the notation relating to the variation pattern A in FIG. 18A and the notation relating to the normal reach effect in FIG.

  On the other hand, there are mainly the following two cases where there is a relatively high possibility that the jackpot will be notified. The first is a case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, and the second is the variation time of the first special symbol although the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”. Is set to a relatively long time (when a variation pattern having a relatively long variation time of the first special symbol is selected).

  Regarding the first case, first, when paying attention to the SPSP reach effect, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, the ratio of 7 symbols selected as the reach symbol is 10%. On the other hand (see FIG. 19), when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, the ratio of 7 symbols selected as the reach symbol is 30%. That is, even when the SPSP reach effect is performed in the same manner, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, the selection ratio of 7 symbols is compared with the case of “losing” Has tripled.

  The following can be said about the second case. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing” and the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a relatively short time, the normal reach effect is easily selected as the reach effect. This is clear from the notation of FIG. As for this normal reach effect, as shown in FIG. 19, the ratio of 7 symbols selected as the reach symbol is 2%. On the other hand, the SPSP reach effect performed when the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a relatively long time even if it is “losing”, as shown in FIG. The ratio of 7 symbols selected as symbols is as high as 10%. As for the SPSP reach effect that is easily selected when the determination result of the first special symbol is “big hit” and the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long, as described above, seven symbols are used as the reach symbol. The rate of selection is considerably high at 30%.

  From the above, when there is a relatively high possibility that the decorative symbol will be stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating “big hit”, the reach symbol is a specific decorative symbol (7 symbols in this embodiment). It can be said that the reach production is easily performed in the configured state.

  However, in the present embodiment, when the reliability for “big hit” is relatively high, the reach effect is likely to be executed in a state where the reach symbol is composed of 7 symbols, the normal reach effect that is a single line reach, the SP In the case where the reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is performed, the increase reach effect in which the reach symbol can be composed of a plurality of decorative symbols does not correspond to this.

  As is apparent from the notations of FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 regarding the increased reach production, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, the reach symbol is 7 compared to the case of “losing”. There is no significant increase in the proportion of symbols. In other words, when it comes to increased reach production, the number of reach symbols and the number of active lines changes according to the reliability with respect to the jackpot, whereas the ratio of the reach symbols including 7 symbols changes according to the reliability with respect to the jackpot. There is no.

Further, when the SPSP reach production and the increase reach production are compared, the following can be said. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, the ratio that the increased reach effect is selected as the reach effect is 33% (= 13 + 11 + 9) in the present embodiment (FIG. 18A). )reference). Further, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, in the present embodiment, the ratio that the increased reach effect is selected as the reach effect is 18% (= 4 + 6 + 8) (FIG. 18 ( B)). In this way, the increase reach production is a reach production that is difficult to select when it is “big hit” and conversely is easy to select when it is “losing”, so the reliability for “big win” is relative. It is clear that this is a low reach production.
In addition, for the increase reach production, the ratio that the 7 symbols are included in the reach symbol does not change significantly depending on whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”. Even if the increased reach effect is performed under the specific condition that the number of the game is increased and the reach symbol includes 7 symbols, the reliability for “big hit” remains relatively low. That is, the 2-line reach effect (or 3-line reach effect) as the second reach effect is a specific decorative pattern (7 symbols in the present embodiment) in one of the two (or three) display lines. However, it is possible to execute the reach effect of the second effect mode in which the decorative pattern is displayed. However, in this second effect mode, the 2-line reach effect (or 3-line reach effect) is possible. ), The reliability for “big hit” remains relatively low.

On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, the ratio at which the SPSP reach effect is selected as the reach effect is approximately 8% (= 5 + 3) in this embodiment (FIG. 18 ( A)). In addition, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, the ratio at which the SPSP reach effect is selected as the reach effect is 40% (= 15 + 25) in this embodiment (FIG. 18 ( B)). Thus, since the SPSP reach production is a reach production that is easy to select when it is a “big hit” and conversely is difficult to select when it is a “losing”, the reliability for the “big hit” is relative. It is clear that this is a high reach production.
As for this SPSP reach production, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, the ratio that the reach symbol becomes 7 symbols is only about 10% (see FIG. 19), but “big hit” In this case, there is a 30% ratio that the reach symbol becomes 7 symbols. For this reason, when the SPSP reach effect is performed in a state where the reach symbol is 7 symbols, it is clear that there is an extremely high possibility that the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing a jackpot at the end of symbol variation. . That is, the SPSP reach effect as the first reach effect may be a specific decorative symbol (7 symbols in the present embodiment, but other decorative symbols) on one display line (an example of the number of first display lines). .) Is displayed, the reach effect of the first effect mode can be executed. However, when the SPSP reach effect is performed in this first effect mode, the effect mode (this is different from the first effect mode) In the embodiment, the reliability for the “big hit” is significantly increased as compared to the case where the SPSP reach effect is performed in a mode in which the 7 symbols are not included in the reach symbols).

  From the above, the reach design (increased reach production) is executed in a state where the reach design and the effective line can be increased and the reach design includes 7 designs, and the reach design is composed of 7 designs. It can be said that there is a low possibility that the jackpot will be finally notified, compared to the case where single line reach (for example, SPSP reach production) is executed in the state. In other words, when the SPSP reach effect is executed in a state where 7 symbols are displayed on the display line, an increase reach effect (here, 2 line reach effect or 3) is displayed in a state where 7 symbols are displayed on the display line. The possibility that the jackpot game is executed is set higher than when the line reach production) is executed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the 7 jacks may be informed of the big hit when the long opening is based on FIG. A configuration is adopted in which jackpots are not notified when the symbols are aligned. In other words, a configuration is adopted in which it is determined and notified that a long opening has been reached due to the 7-pattern alignment.
For this reason, when winning per long opening, a reach symbol is selected by referring to the jackpot reach design selection table shown in FIG. 20, but when winning per short opening, normal reach production or SP reach is selected. A reach symbol is selected with reference to another table in which the selection rate of 7 symbols related to single line reach such as the effect and the SPSP reach effect is set to “0”.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the specific condition is that the reach symbol and the effective line are increased by performing the increase reach effect is described, but the specific condition is not limited to this. For example, the specific condition may be that the SP reach effect is performed. In this case, when the SP reach effect is executed in a state where the reach symbol is composed of 7 symbols, the reach symbol is 7 symbols. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which it is unlikely that the jackpot will be finally notified, compared to the case where the SPSP reach effect is executed in the state configured with.

[Modified example of increased reach production]
Note that the increase reach effect may be in the following manner.
In other words, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the symbol alignment effect can be performed twice or more with respect to the 2-line reach effect and the 3-line reach effect. On the other hand, in other embodiments, regarding the two-line reach effect and the three-line reach effect, the winning of the symbol may be performed by performing the symbol matching effect only once. For example, when a two-line reach effect is performed in a state where 5 and 6 symbols are displayed as reach symbols, a pattern matching effect is performed only once, for example, a straight line connecting two five symbols and two six symbols are connected. You may employ | adopt the structure which becomes "missing" when the 5 symbol or 6 symbol stops in the position where a straight line crosses, and "decoration" when the decoration symbol different from these symbols stops. In other words, a configuration may be adopted in which the actual effective line does not increase while presuming that the apparent effective line has increased due to the increase in reach symbols.

  Further, in the present embodiment, with respect to the 2-line reach effect (or 3-line reach effect), a configuration that can sequentially perform the pattern matching effect for each effective line in a state where two (or three) effective lines intersect. Explained. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the display area of the liquid crystal screen 5 may be partitioned into a plurality of display areas, and each reach symbol and effective line may be individually displayed in each display area. For example, when executing a two-line reach effect, first, the display area of the liquid crystal screen 5 is divided into two divided areas, and the first reach symbol and the first effective line are displayed in the first divided area. The second reach symbol and the second effective line are displayed in the second divided area. First, a pattern matching effect is performed on the first active line displayed in the first divided area, which gives the player a sense of expectation that the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol has stopped. Here, when it is determined that the symbol is a “big hit” at the start of the symbol variation, the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol stops on the active line as a result of this symbol matching effect, and the “big hit” is notified There is. On the other hand, if the same decorative design as the reach design does not stop on the effective line as a result of the design matching effect for the first effective line, the second effective line displayed in the second divided area As a result, a similar pattern matching effect is performed. Here, when it is determined that “big hit” at the start of symbol variation, the same decorative symbol as the reach symbol stops on the active line as a result of this second symbol matching effect, and “big hit” Will be notified. On the other hand, if it is determined that the symbol pattern is “lost” at the start of the symbol variation, the decorative symbol different from the reach symbol stops on the effective line as a result of the second symbol alignment effect, "Will be notified.

On the other hand, when performing a three-line reach effect, the display area of the liquid crystal screen 5 is divided into three divided areas, and the same pattern as the above-described two-line reach effect is applied to all or a part of each divided area. A uniform production will be performed.
Needless to say, the upper limit of the number of reach symbols and the number of effective lines for the increase reach effect is not limited to “3”, but may be “4” or more. For example, in the case of performing a 6-line reach effect, the display area of the liquid crystal screen 5 is divided into six divided areas, and a pattern matching effect for all or a part of each divided area is performed.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a plurality of display screens, the reach symbol and the effective line may be individually displayed on each screen. For example, a first sub-screen and a second sub-screen smaller than the liquid crystal screen 5 are provided on the liquid crystal screen 5, and for example, four symbols and five symbols are additionally displayed with respect to three symbols to perform a three-line reach effect. In such a case, for example, two three symbols and effective lines defined by these three symbols are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5, and two four symbols and effective lines defined by these four symbols are displayed on the first sub-screen. As an example, a configuration in which two 5 symbols and an effective line defined by these 5 symbols are additionally displayed on the second sub-screen.

[Characteristics of each decorative design]
Hereinafter, the feature of each decorative design will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 21 is a list for explaining decorative symbols.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbols composed of several sequences in which the numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction are displayed in three rows in the horizontal direction, and the first special symbol is displayed. When the variable display is started, these decorative symbols are displayed so as to scroll from top to bottom. For this reason, the 5 screens on the LCD screen have 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 3 symbols, 4 symbols, 5 symbols, 6 symbols, 7 symbols, 8 symbols, and 9 symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column, respectively. In this order, they will appear on the LCD screen. In addition to 3 and 7 symbols, these decorative symbols include 1 symbol, 2 symbols, 4 symbols to 6 symbols, 8 symbols, and 9 symbols as second decorative symbols, which are more numerous than these decorative symbols. Then, after being displayed in a variable manner so as to be displayed in the order of the above 1 symbol to 9 symbols, one of these decorative symbols is stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the 3 symbols and 7 symbols are displayed with a predetermined emblem on the back, while the remaining decorative symbols are displayed with no such emblem on the back. For this reason, it is easy to distinguish the 3 symbols, 7 symbols, and other decorative symbols.

  In the state where the decorative symbols are scrolled at a high speed, it is difficult to clearly see these decorative symbols, but the scrolling speed of the decorative symbols in each column gradually decreases, It becomes possible to easily see how the decorative symbols are scrolled in order, and it is also easy to distinguish the 3 symbols or 7 symbols from other decorative symbols.

  FIG. 21 shows nine decorative symbols from 1 to 9 symbols that can be displayed in any of the left column, the middle column, and the right column. Are displayed in the normal display mode in the figure. This is apparent from the notations of FIGS. 9 to 13 and 15 to 17 described above.

  On the other hand, the nine decorative symbols are configured to be able to change to both the first display mode and the second display mode, or any one of them during the variable display of the first special symbol. In the present embodiment, the odd symbols of the 1 symbol, 3 symbol, 5 symbol, 7 symbol, and 9 symbols can be changed to the decorative symbols of the first display mode to which they correspond respectively. It is possible to change to the corresponding decorative pattern of the second display mode. On the other hand, even symbols of 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, and 8 symbols can be changed to decorative symbols of the first display mode corresponding to each, but they are changed to decorative symbols of the second display mode. This is different from odd-numbered symbols in that there is nothing.

  As will be described in detail later, each even symbol does not change to the decorative symbol of the second display mode, but changes to the special symbol illustrated in FIG. 22 during the variable display of the first special symbol. Is possible. On the other hand, each of the odd symbols is different from the even symbols in that the odd symbols are not changed to these special symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative symbols in which each of the nine symbols from the first symbol is changed to the first display mode are the decorative symbols imitating the robot, and the decorative symbols in which the respective odd symbols are changed to the second display mode. A case where the design is a decorative design imitating a car will be described as an example. For this reason, in the following description, the decorative symbol changed to the first display mode may be referred to as “robo symbol”, and the decorative symbol changed to the second display mode may be referred to as “car symbol”. In addition, the decorative symbol of the normal display mode is called by a name combining a numerical value and a character such as a symbol, for example, “1 symbol” or “2 symbol”. In the present embodiment, there is a case where an effect is performed in which an odd symbol transformed into a robot symbol and an even symbol transformed into a robot symbol perform a battle (see, for example, FIG. 24). For this reason, in the following description, an odd symbol transformed into a Robo symbol may be referred to as a “friend symbol”, and an even symbol transformed into a Robo symbol may be referred to as an “enemy symbol”.

Further, as is clear from the notation of FIG. 21, which number is the number indicated by the decoration symbol of the corresponding normal display mode in each robot design of the first display mode and each vehicle design of the second display mode. Are attached with numbers so that they can be easily recognized and easily distinguished from other decorative designs, but Robo designs and car designs may not be given such numbers. .
Hereinafter, the characteristics of each odd symbol out of the 1 symbol to 9 symbols will be described.

(About 1 design)
First, one symbol is yellowish green in the normal display mode, and the color is different from the decorative symbols in the other normal display modes. For this reason, the player can easily distinguish one symbol from other decorative symbols based on the number and color indicated by the one symbol. In addition, one symbol has higher visibility than an even number symbol that is not marked with a characteristic color, and three symbols or symbols that are marked with a specific color and displayed with a predetermined emblem are displayed. Visibility is lower than 7 designs. For this reason, it can be said that the visibility of one symbol is medium.

  In addition, when one symbol is pseudo-stopped on the screen, a normal stop sound is output. In this embodiment, three types of normal stop sounds are prepared. In other words, the first normal stop sound is a dedicated stop sound for the left column that is output from the speaker 24 when the decorative design is pseudo-stopped in the left column. The second normal stop sound is a middle row dedicated stop sound that is output from the speaker 24 when the decorative design is pseudo-stopped in the middle row. The third normal stop sound is a right-row dedicated stop sound that is output from the speaker 24 when the decorative design is pseudo-stopped in the right row. As described above, in this embodiment, three different types of normal stop sounds are prepared, and when one symbol is pseudo-stopped to the left column, a dedicated stop sound for the left column is output, and one symbol is simulated to the middle column. When stopping, the middle row dedicated stop sound is output, and when one symbol is pseudo-stopped in the right row, the right row dedicated stop sound is output.

  It should be noted that the normal stop sound is output when the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped, not only for one symbol but also for the decorative symbols excluding 3 symbols and 7 symbols out of 2 symbols to 9 symbols as in the case of 1 symbol. A normal stop sound is output. However, in other embodiments, the normal stop sound may be one type. That is, the stop sound when the decorative symbols other than the 3 symbols and the 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped may be the same when the decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped in any column.

  Returning to the description of the features of one symbol, the one symbol can be transformed into the robot 1 symbol in the first display mode, and can also be transformed into the car 1 symbol in the second display mode. The Robo 1 symbol suggests in advance execution of an icon change effect that changes the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the hold area 51 or changes the display mode of the icon displayed in the area 52. It has a function (see FIGS. 23F to 23H). In the present embodiment, as is apparent from the notations of FIGS. 23 to 27, the Robo 1 symbol is used for each icon change effect. For this reason, in this embodiment, it can be said that Robo 1 design has both the function which suggests execution of an icon change effect in advance, and the function which performs an icon change effect.

  Here, the icon change effect will be described. The icon change effect in the present embodiment is an effect of changing the display color of the hold icon (or the icon). The hold icon is normally displayed as a white hold icon. On the other hand, when an icon change effect is performed, the color may change to a color different from white, such as blue, yellow, green, red, gold, and iridescent. In addition, the colors other than white exemplified here are arranged in order from the low reliability for the jackpot. The rainbow color is a color that can be selected only when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”. Gold and red are easily selected when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” or when the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a relatively long time although it is “lost”. Color. In addition, green is set to a time when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” or a time when the variation time of the first special symbol is “losing” but the first special symbol variation time is medium. This is a color that can be easily selected. Blue and yellow are when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, or when it is “losing” and the variation time of the first special symbol is set to a relatively short time. It is a color that can be easily selected. Here, the display color has been described by taking the hold icon as an example, but the same applies to the color of the icon that is the icon that the hold icon has moved to the area 52.

  One vehicle 1 symbol has a function of suggesting in advance execution of a pseudo continuous notice effect (see FIGS. 55D to 55F). Here, the quasi-continuous notice effect is an effect that makes it appear as if the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner a plurality of times while the special symbol is displayed once in a variable manner. This pseudo-continuous notice effect is realized by alternately repeating a short variation display in which three rows of decorative symbols are variably displayed for a time shorter than the variation time, and a pseudo stop of the three rows of decorative symbols. For example, when the first short variation display (pseudo first sequence) is finished, the three rows of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, and then short variation display is started again. Then, when the pseudo variation display of the second pseudo sequence is finished, the three rows of decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped, and when the micro variation display is started again thereafter, the pseudo third sequence is entered. Here, the outline in the case of developing up to the pseudo third series has been described, but the pseudo continuous notice effect may be developed only up to the pseudo second series, or may be developed up to the pseudo fourth series. is there. The pseudo continuous notice effect is mainly performed before the reach is established, but may be performed after the reach is established.

  Further, in this embodiment, as is clear from FIGS. 55E to 55F, vehicle symbols such as the vehicle 1 symbol are used for the pseudo continuous notice effect (see also FIGS. 48H and 48I). ). For this reason, in this embodiment, it can be said that the vehicle 1 symbol has both a function that suggests the execution of the pseudo continuous notice effect in advance and a function that performs the pseudo continuous notice effect. In this embodiment, one symbol is transformed into one car symbol and developed into a pseudo-continuous notice effect is limited to after a normal reach loss. For this reason, it can be said that the appearance rate of the pattern that develops from the transformation of one symbol into one car symbol to the pseudo continuous notice effect is lower than that in the case where the other pattern develops to the pseudo continuous notice effect.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the present embodiment, among the odd symbols transformed into the vehicle symbols, regarding the pseudo continuous notice effect, the functions of the car 5 symbols and the car 9 symbols are the same functions as the car 1 symbol (pseudo continuous notice). The vehicle 3 symbol and the car 7 symbol do not have the same function. This has the function of suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuous notice effect or performing the pseudo-continuous notice effect with respect to the three symbols and the seven symbols, instead of these vehicle symbols. Because.

(About 3 designs)
The three symbols are yellow in the normal display mode of the first display mode, and are different in color from the decorative symbols in other normal display modes. For this reason, the player can easily distinguish the 3 symbols from other decorative symbols based on the numbers and colors indicated by the 3 symbols. The three symbols are the same as the one symbol in that a characteristic color is given, but the three symbols are different from the one symbol in that they carry a predetermined emblem. For this reason, it can be said that the visibility of the three symbols is high.

  In addition, when the three symbols are pseudo-stopped on the screen, a special stop sound is output. This special stop sound is a stop sound that is different from any of the three types of normal stop sounds, namely, the left-row dedicated stop sound, the middle-row dedicated stop sound, and the right-row dedicated stop sound. It is a characteristic stop sound that is easier for the player to recognize than a sound (for example, a higher sound than a normal stop sound). When the three symbols are pseudo-stopped, a special stop sound is output instead of the normal stop sound regardless of which of the three lines stops. It should be noted that the special stop sound is output when the three symbols are pseudo-stopped in this way, which suggests that the performance suggested by the Robo 3 symbol or the car 3 symbol is relatively highly reliable for the jackpot This is to give the player the impression that a chance may have come due to the appearance of three symbols. The same applies to the 7 symbols. In the present embodiment, when the 3 symbols or 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped, a high reliability suggesting effect indicating that the reliability with respect to the jackpot is relatively high is always executed (or necessarily developed into a high reliability suggesting effect). For this reason, it is possible to effectively suggest that the high reliability suggesting effect is performed by pseudo-stopping the 3 symbols and 7 symbols and outputting the special stop sound.

  In addition, in this embodiment, in order to make it easy for a player to recognize the special stop sound of 3 symbols and 7 symbols, the structure which outputs a sound higher than a normal stop sound as a special stop sound is employ | adopted. On the other hand, in another embodiment, in order to make it easier to recognize the special stop sound than the normal stop sound, a configuration may be adopted in which the special stop sound is output at a volume higher than that of the normal stop sound. Further, the two configurations described here may be employed together. In other words, an effect sound that is higher in volume and louder than the normal stop sound may be output as a special stop sound.

  The 3 symbols can be transformed into the robot 3 symbols in the first display mode, and can also be transformed into the car 3 symbols in the second display mode. The Robo 3 symbol has both a function that suggests the execution of the pseudo continuous notice effect described above in advance and a function that executes the pseudo continuous notice effect (see FIGS. 28 to 31). In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which whenever the three symbols are transformed into a car symbol, the pseudo continuous notice effect is developed. On the other hand, the above-mentioned car 1 symbol, car 5 symbol, and car 9 symbol are not necessarily developed into a pseudo-continuous notice effect just because they are successfully transformed into car symbols. Even if there is, there is a gase effect pattern that does not develop into a pseudo-continuous notice effect. For this reason, even if one symbol, five symbols, and nine symbols are pseudo-stopped on the screen, it cannot be said that a chance has come. On the other hand, if the transformation from the 3 symbols to the Robo 3 symbols is successful, a pseudo-continuous notice effect that easily leads to a jackpot always occurs, so it can be said that the appearance of the Robo 3 symbol itself is a so-called hot effect. With regard to the 3 symbols before being transformed into the Robo 3 symbols, the visibility is set high, and this is the main reason why a special stop sound is output at the time of a pseudo stop.

  One car 3 symbol has a function of suggesting execution of a specific effect in cooperation with other vehicle symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, prior to execution of the SPSP reach production, the SPSP reach development production effect is performed to raise the player's expectation for developing to the SPSP reach production. When the vehicle symbol is pseudo-stopped in all of the right columns, the SPSP reach development effect is started (see FIGS. 45E to 45I). For this reason, it can be said that the car 3 symbol has a function that suggests in advance execution of the SPSP reach development effect in cooperation with other vehicle symbols. The same applies to other vehicle designs.

(About 5 designs)
The 5 symbols are blue in the normal display mode of the first display mode, and are different in color from the decorative symbols of other normal display modes. Therefore, the player can easily distinguish the 5 symbols from the other decorative symbols based on the numbers and colors indicated by the 5 symbols. The 5 symbols are the same as the 1 symbol and the like in that a characteristic color is given, but are different from the 3 and 7 symbols in that they do not carry a predetermined emblem. For this reason, it can be said that the visibility of the five symbols is moderate. When these five symbols are pseudo-stopped, a normal stop sound corresponding to the stop position is output as in the case of one symbol.

  The 5 symbol can be transformed into the robot 5 symbol in the first display mode, and can also be transformed into the car 5 symbol in the second display mode. Robo 5 design has a function to suggest the future development. As will be described in detail later, when 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped to the left or right row and transformed into Robo 5 symbols, the Robo 5 symbols are added to the left, right, and middle rows, respectively, and three times. The subsequent development image is suggested by the effect images stopped in these three rows in accordance with the punches (see FIGS. 32 to 34).

  One car 5 symbol has the same function as other vehicle symbols in that it suggests execution of SPSP reach development effect in cooperation with the other two vehicle symbols.

(About 7 patterns)
The seven symbols are red in the normal display mode of the first display mode, and are different in color from the decorative symbols in the other normal display modes. Moreover, the 7 symbols carry a predetermined emblem like the 3 symbols, and it can be said that the visibility is high like the 3 symbols. Further, when 7 symbols stop on the screen, a special stop sound is output. This special stop sound is output in the same manner as when 3 symbols are pseudo-stopped on the screen.

  The 7 symbol can be transformed into the robot 7 symbol in the first display mode, and can also be transformed into the car 7 symbol in the second display mode. The Robo 7 symbol is common to the Robo 3 symbol in that it has both a function that suggests the execution of the pseudo continuous notice effect in advance and a function that performs the pseudo continuous notice effect, but the pseudo continuous notice effect is the pseudo third series. Alternatively, it differs from the Robo 3 symbol in that it appears only when it develops to the pseudo fourth series. That is, when the robot 3 symbol appears at the time of the first pseudo stop after the start of symbol variation, the pseudo continuous notice effect may develop only up to the pseudo second sequence, or the pseudo third sequence or pseudo four sequence. It may develop into the eyes. On the other hand, when Robo 7 symbol appears at the first pseudo stop, the pseudo continuous notice effect does not end in the second series, and it always develops to the pseudo third series or the pseudo fourth series. (See FIGS. 35 and 36). For this reason, it can be said that the appearance of the Robo 7 symbol itself is a hotter effect than the appearance of the Robo 3 symbol. Regarding the 7 symbols before being transformed into the Robo 7 symbols, the visibility is set high, and this is the main reason why a special stop sound is output at the time of a pseudo stop.

  One car 7 symbol is the same as the other vehicle symbol in that it suggests the execution of SPSP reach development effect in cooperation with other vehicle symbols. In the present embodiment, when the 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column and then transformed into the 7 symbols of the car, the player is expected to make a transition to a highly reliable special performance mode called a so-called zone. (FIGS. 37 to 39), regardless of whether or not the transition to the special effect mode is made after this roaring effect, if it is successfully transformed into the car 7 symbol, it will surely be developed into an SPSP reach effect. Become. For this reason, it can be said that the appearance of the car 7 symbol itself is also a hot production like the appearance of the robot 7 symbol.

  In addition, when the reach effect is performed in a state where the reach is established with 7 symbols, the reliability for the jackpot is relatively higher than when the reach effect is performed in a state where the reach is achieved with other decorative symbols. In addition, when the first special symbol indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” is stopped and displayed, three seven symbols are stopped and displayed, that is, the seven symbols are aligned. In this case, the number of rounds of the long open round game performed during the jackpot game is larger than when three other decorative symbols are arranged. For this reason, when 7 symbols are aligned for the “big hit” related to the first special symbol determination, more prize balls can be obtained by the player during the jackpot game than when three other decorative symbols are aligned. . In addition, when 7 symbols are aligned for the “big hit” related to the second special symbol determination, the maximum number of long open round games during the big hit game played in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is maximized, so the maximum win It is possible to obtain a number of prize balls.

  In addition, when the first special symbol indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a jackpot is stopped and displayed as seven symbols are aligned, it is illustrated in FIG. 5C during the jackpot game. As described above, the long open round game of the second winning port 19 for operating the first blade member 191 and the second blade member 192 in an operation mode in which the game ball can easily enter the V region 195 is performed. Become. On the other hand, when the game ball launched by the player during the long open round game wins V, the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, when the same special symbol other than 7 symbols is stopped and displayed in conjunction with the first special symbol indicating “big hit” being stopped, the long open round game is performed. However, a short open round game in which the first blade member 191 and the second blade member 192 are operated in an operation mode in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V region 195 may be performed.

  As described above, when the big win is achieved with the 7 symbols, the player is most advantageous to the player. Therefore, the 7 symbols in this embodiment are more advantageous to the player than the other decorative symbols. It can be said that it is a special decorative design that suggests that it is easy.

  In this example, when the jackpot game is executed with 7 symbols aligned, the case where the long open round game of the second winning opening 19 is always performed during the jackpot game has been described. You may employ | adopt the same structure as this.

(About 9 designs)
The 9 symbols are vermilion in the normal display mode of the first display mode, and are different in color from the decorative symbols in other normal display modes. For this reason, the player can easily distinguish the 9 symbols from other decorative symbols based on the numbers and the colors indicated by the 9 symbols. Nine symbols are the same as one symbol in that a characteristic color is given, but are different from three symbols and seven symbols in that they do not carry a predetermined emblem. For this reason, it can be said that the visibility of 9 symbols is moderate. When the nine symbols are pseudo-stopped, a normal stop sound corresponding to the stop position is output as in the case of one symbol.

  The 9 symbol can be transformed into the robot 9 symbol in the first display mode, and can also be transformed into the car 9 symbol in the second display mode. The robot 9 symbol has a function that suggests execution of a predetermined roulette effect. In this embodiment, when 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped in 2 out of 3 rows, these 2 9 symbols are transformed into Robo 9 symbols. Then, a predetermined roulette effect is performed to suggest subsequent development (see FIGS. 40 and 41). That is, the robot 9 symbol has a function of suggesting the execution of the roulette effect in cooperation with the same robot 9 symbol, and suggesting the subsequent development by executing the roulette effect. The roulette effect suggests, for example, the development to a pseudo-continuous notice effect, the transition to the special effect mode, the reliability for the jackpot, the development to an icon change effect, the development to a predetermined reach effect, and the like.

  In this embodiment, when 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped in 2 out of 3 columns, the roulette effect is surely developed. For example, 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column and the same 9 symbols are simulated in the right column. Even if it stops, it does not become reach, but develops into the roulette production described above. In the present embodiment, by setting the selection rate of 9 symbols in the reach symbol selection table described above based on FIGS. 19 and 20 to “0” in advance, a configuration in which reach is not established for 9 symbols is realized. Yes.

  One car design is the same as the other car design in that it suggests the execution of SPSP reach development effect in cooperation with other car designs. Further, like the car 1 symbol and the car 5 symbol, it has a function of suggesting the execution of the pseudo continuous notice effect in advance.

(Even number design)
The even symbols of 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, and 8 symbols are all displayed in gray, and are not displayed with a predetermined emblem as in the case of 3 symbols or 7 symbols. For this reason, it can be said that the visibility of these even symbols is low compared to other decorative symbols. Further, when these even symbols are pseudo-stopped, a normal stop sound corresponding to the column to be stopped is output. The output of the normal stop sound is the same as that of the odd symbols except for the 3 symbols and 7 symbols.

  Each odd symbol is deformable to the robot symbol of the first display mode, but adopts a configuration that cannot be deformed to the vehicle symbol of the second display mode. Even-numbered robot symbols do not perform any function by themselves, but are configured to perform a predetermined function by cooperating with other decorative symbols.

  For example, if one symbol is pseudo-stopped in the left column, two symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column, 1 symbol is transformed into Robo 1 symbol, and 2 symbols are transformed into Robo 2 symbols, a push icon change effect is performed. (See FIGS. 24-27). Specifically, an effect display in which the robot 1 symbol wearing the aura of a predetermined color and the robot 2 symbol are pressed is performed, and if the robot 1 symbol (friend symbol) wins, the icon (or holding icon) is displayed. If an icon change effect that changes the mode is performed and the robot 2 symbol (enemy symbol) wins, the display mode of the icon (or the hold icon) is maintained. As described above, the Robo 2 symbol has both a function of suggesting execution of the pressing icon change effect in cooperation with the Robo 1 symbol and a function of executing the pressing icon change effect.

  In addition, if all the three even-numbered symbols are pseudo-stopped and all three even-numbered symbols can be transformed into robotic symbols, the transition to the special effect mode is notified. That is, when the three even symbols are transformed into robot symbols and cooperated, the transition to the special effect mode is suggested (see FIG. 43).

  In this embodiment, the odd number symbol can be transformed into both the robot symbol and the vehicle symbol, and the even symbol can be transformed into only the robot symbol. However, in other embodiments, the odd symbol is not an odd symbol but an even symbol. You may employ | adopt the structure which a pattern can deform | transform into both a robot design and a vehicle design. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure which both an odd number design and an even number design can deform | transform into both a robot design and a vehicle design.

  In this embodiment, the case where the shape of each decorative design changes will be described as an example. However, in the other embodiments, a configuration in which the color or size is changed without changing the shape of each decorative design is adopted. May be. Moreover, you may employ | adopt the structure of changing a color and a magnitude | size together with changing the color of each decoration design.

  FIG. 22 is a list for explaining special symbols. While the above-described odd symbol cannot be transformed into the special symbol illustrated in FIG. 22, each odd symbol described above can be transformed into a special symbol in addition to the vehicle symbol.

  The partial symbol shown in FIG. 22 is displayed on the left panel in which the character “N” displayed in the left column is drawn, the middle panel in which the character “ES” is displayed in the middle row, and the right panel. And the right panel on which the letter “T” is drawn. Even during the variable display of the 1st special symbol, the even symbol pseudo-stopped in the left column changes to the left panel, the even symbol pseudo-stopped in the right column changes to the right panel, and the even symbol pseudo-stopped in the middle column When the panel is changed, a predetermined display object (here, one plate on which “NEST” is written) is formed. When a predetermined display object is formed in this way, it develops into a specific reach effect (see FIGS. 49H and 49). Thus, each even symbol has a function that suggests development to a specific reach effect by forming a predetermined display object.

  Note that the left panel, the middle panel, and the right panel illustrated in FIG. 22 each appear as a result of deformation of even-numbered symbols, but there may be cases where the robot 5 symbols appear due to the effect of punching each row.

  Further, the development suggestion symbol in which the character “transfer” illustrated in FIG. 22 is drawn may appear by deformation of each even symbol (see FIG. 42H). This development suggestion symbol may appear due to deformation of even-numbered symbols and is displayed in three rows, suggesting direct development to SPSP reach production without going through normal reach production or SP reach production, for example. It has a function to do. Note that the above three development destination suggestion symbols may appear due to the effect that the robot 5 symbols punch each row.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the decorative symbol of the first display mode is the robot symbol and the decorative symbol of the second display mode is the vehicle symbol will be described. These decorative symbols are the first display mode. As long as the player can easily identify the second display mode and the second display mode, other decorative designs may be used. For example, the decorative pattern in the first display mode may be a decorative pattern that imitates an animal, and the decorative symbol in the second display mode may be a decorative pattern that imitates a plant.

[1 design icon change effect]
FIG. 23 is a screen diagram illustrating a specific example of one symbol icon change effect. As illustrated in FIG. 23A, for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state in which the number of the first special symbol determination is “3”, it is displayed in the holding area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 23B).

  In this way, when a predetermined time elapses after the display of the variation of the symbol is started, for example, one symbol is pseudo-stopped in the right column (see FIG. 23C). And this 1 symbol performs the predetermined | prescribed deformation | transformation action which is going to deform | transform into Robo 1 symbol (refer FIG.23 (D)). Here, if the transformation to Robo 1 symbol fails, it is not shown in the diagram, but the symbol that was performing the transformation action returns to the original symbol and stops, or advances one frame 2 The design will stop.

  On the other hand, when one symbol performs a deformation action and succeeds in deformation into the robot 1 symbol, the deformed robot 1 symbol moves so as to jump out from the right column to the left column (see FIG. 23D). Along with this, the decorative symbols in the row where the one symbol was originally located (here, the right row) are restarted.

  The robot 1 symbol that has jumped out to the left column attacks the beam so as to irradiate the entire area from the area 52 to the reserved area 51 (see FIGS. 23F and 23G). As a result, the display mode of the icon displayed in the area 52 may change as illustrated in FIG. 23 (G), and the reserved area as illustrated in FIG. 23 (H). The display mode of the hold icon displayed in 51 may change.

  In this way, when the icon change effect in which the robot 1 symbol changes the icon or the hold icon is performed, the robot 1 symbol leaves the liquid crystal screen 5 and the subsequent effect is developed (FIG. 23 (I)).

  In addition, when the display mode of the icon changes, the current symbol variation (the variation) becomes a big hit opportunity, and when the display mode of the hold icon changes, the symbol corresponding to the changed hold icon Fluctuation is a big hit opportunity.

  As described above, the Robo 1 symbol independently has an ability to execute an icon change effect that changes the display mode of the icon or the hold icon while suggesting the icon change effect in advance.

  Note that FIG. 23 shows a change in the display mode (for example, display color) of the icon or the hold icon, but even if the robot 1 pattern is attacked by beam irradiation, the icon or the hold icon There is also an effect of a gaze effect pattern in which the display mode does not change.

  In addition, FIG. 23 illustrates a state in which the display mode of one of the icons and the two held icons changes as a result of a single attack based on one Robo design. Thus, an effect display in which the display mode of the plurality of icons changes may be performed.

[Pressing icon change effect for the icon]
24 and 25 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the pressing icon change effect for the icon. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if one symbol is pseudo-stopped in the left column and two symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column, and any of these symbols can be transformed into a robot symbol, the push against the icon It develops into icon change production.

  As illustrated in FIG. 24 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 24B).

  In this way, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of symbol variation display, for example, one symbol is pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 24C), and then two symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column ( (See FIG. 24D). Then, a deformation action is performed to transform the 1 symbol and 2 symbols simultaneously (or in the order in which the symbols are pseudo-stopped) into the corresponding robot symbols (see FIG. 24E).

  Although not shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, a gasse effect pattern that does not develop into a push icon change effect is provided, in which one or both symbols and / or one symbol cannot be transformed into a robot symbol. ing.

  Here, if the transformation of the two decorative symbols into the robot symbol is successful by the transformation action, the robot 1 symbol (the friend symbol) has an aura of the same color as the color that the icon (here, the icon) may change. The effect image) is displayed on the left side of the screen while the robot 2 symbol (enemy symbol) is displayed on the right side of the screen (see FIG. 24F). In this embodiment, the display color of the icon or the hold icon is white, blue, yellow, green, red, gold, or rainbow. For this reason, for example, when the white icon is displayed, one symbol is displayed in a state in which auras of any one of blue, yellow, green, red, gold, and rainbow colors are collected.

  When the robot 1 symbol and the robot 2 symbol are displayed so as to face each other in this way, the icon displayed in the area 52 (for example, the white icon) moves to the center of the screen while expanding (FIG. 24). (See (G)). Subsequently, a pressing effect is performed in which the symbol is pressed by the symbol 1 and symbol 2 (see FIG. 24H). In FIG. 24 (H), the icon is displayed as an enlarged icon that is larger than when the icon is displayed in the area 52, and the left half of the icon is the aura that the Robo 1 symbol is wearing. The state of the same color is illustrated, and it is suggested that the icon may change to the same color as the aura of the Robo 1 symbol.

  Here, when the effect pattern of the push icon change effect is internally selected such that the Robo 1 symbol pushes over and the icon changes to the color of the aura, FIGS. As illustrated in I), Robo 1 symbol pushes and Robo 2 symbol is pushed down, and the entire icon displayed in the center of the screen changes to the same color as the aura that Robo 1 symbol is wearing. An effect display showing how to do is performed.

  When the Robo 1 symbol wins in this way, the Robo 1 symbol moves away from the screen, and the icon located at the center of the screen returns to the area 52 while the icon located in the center is reduced, and the subsequent effects are developed. (See FIGS. 25A to 25C).

  On the other hand, when the production pattern of the push icon change production is internally selected such that the design pattern of the robot 1 is pushed and lost and the display color of the icon is maintained, FIG. 24 (H) and FIG. As illustrated in E) to (F), the robot 2 symbol is pushed forward and the robot 1 symbol is pushed down, and the left half is the same color as the aura of the robot 1 symbol. An effect display representing a state of returning to the color of is performed. Then, the robot 2 symbol moves away from the liquid crystal screen 5, and the icon that has returned to the original display color returns to the region 52 while being reduced (see FIGS. 25F and 25G).

  Here, since the reliability of the jackpot is relatively low, as is apparent from the fact that the display color of the icon has not changed, the losing is notified after the losing symbol is pseudo-stopped (FIG. 25 (H) and ( I)), the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold area 51 is performed, and the symbol variation is started (see FIG. 25J).

  In the present embodiment, an effect pattern in which the robot 1 symbol is pushed over the robot 2 symbol is determined when the display color of the icon is internally changed to green, red, gold, or rainbow. It is configured to be selected only. For this reason, when the robot 1 symbol wins over the robot 2 symbol, the display color of the icon always changes to green or more.

  In addition, when the display color after the change of the icon is determined to be red, gold, or rainbow, that is, when the robot 1 pattern is to combine a red, gold, or rainbow aura, the robot 1 An effect pattern in which the design pushes and wins over the Robo 2 design is always selected, and an effect pattern in which the Robo 1 design is pushed against the Robo 2 design is not selected.

  As is clear from the above description, the display color after the change of the icon is suggested in advance by the color of the aura worn by the Robo 1 symbol before the display mode of the icon changes. For this reason, the player can grasp in advance which color the display color of the icon may change based on the aura of the Robo 1 symbol, and the Robo 1 symbol will win and win. The game can be enjoyed while expecting the icon to change to the color.

  Further, when the aura color of the Robo 1 symbol is any one of red, gold, and rainbow, the Robo 1 symbol always pushes and changes the display color of the icon. For this reason, the player can know in advance that the display color of the icon has been determined to change and the display color after the icon has changed.

  On the other hand, even if it is determined internally that the display color of the icon is not changed, or even if it is determined that the display color of the icon is changed, the display color after the change is yellow or less (blue or yellow) When selected, an effect pattern in which Robo 1 symbol is always defeated by Robo 2 symbol is selected. In these two cases, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect pattern in which Robo 1 symbol is pushed over Robo 2 symbol is not selected (selection rate is set to “0”). In addition, when it is determined that the display color of the icon is changed to green, an effect pattern in which Robo 1 design pushes ahead of Robo 2 design may be selected, or Robo 1 design is pushed on Robo 2 design. In some cases, a losing performance pattern is selected.

  Here, the case where the push icon change effect is performed before the reach is established has been described, but the push icon change effect may be performed after the reach is established. Specifically, after the reach is established, the decorative symbols in each row are restarted, and then the first and second symbols are pseudo-stopped, and these decorative symbols are transformed into robot symbols to develop a push icon effect. An example is a pattern.

[Pressing icon change effect for hold icon]
26 and 27 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the push icon change effect for the hold icon. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if one symbol is pseudo-stopped in the left column and two symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column, and these symbols can all be transformed into robot symbols, the push against the hold icon There are cases where it develops into an icon change effect.

  As exemplified in FIG. 26 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 26B).

  In this way, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation display is started, for example, one symbol is pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 26C), and then two symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column ( FIG. 26D). Then, a deformation action is performed in which these 1 symbol and 2 symbols are simultaneously (or in the order in which they are pseudo-stopped) to transform each symbol into a corresponding robot symbol (see FIG. 26E).

  Although not shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, a gasse effect pattern that does not develop into a push icon change effect is provided, in which one or both symbols and / or one symbol cannot be transformed into a robot symbol. ing.

  Here, when the transformation of the two decorative symbols into the robot symbol is successful by the transformation action, the icon (here, the hold icon) may change as described above with reference to FIG. The robot 1 symbol is displayed on the left side of the screen and the robot 2 symbol is displayed on the right side of the screen (see FIG. 26F). The color of the aura worn by the Robo 1 symbol is determined to be the same color as the display color that may change the hold icon, but the determination method is the same as in the case of performing the push icon effect on the icon. Therefore, detailed description here is omitted.

  When the Robo 1 symbol and the Robo 2 symbol are displayed so as to confront each other, a pseudo icon imitating any of the hold icons displayed in the hold area 51 appears in the center of the screen (see FIG. 26G). Following this, a push-in effect in which the symbol and the symbol are pressed against each other is performed (see FIG. 26H). In FIG. 26 (H), a pseudo icon that is larger than the hold icon displayed in the hold area 51 is displayed as an enlarged pseudo icon, and the left half of the pseudo icon is an aura in which the robot 1 symbol is gathered. It is suggested that there is a possibility that any of the held icons may change to the same color as the aura of the Robo 1 symbol.

  Here, when the effect pattern of the push icon change effect is internally selected such that the Robo 1 symbol pushes and the hold icon changes to the color of the aura, FIG. 26 (H) and ( As illustrated in I), an effect display representing a state in which the robot 1 symbol is pushed and won and the robot 2 symbol is pushed down is performed. Then, as the Robo 1 symbol moves away from the screen, a pseudo icon that has the same color as the aura that the Robo 1 symbol is wearing moves to the holding area 51 and collides with one of the holding icons. It changes to the same color as the similar icon (see FIGS. 27A to 27C).

  Thereafter, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon is a loss, a loss eye is displayed (see FIG. 27D), and the first hold icon displayed in the hold area 51 is displayed. The corresponding first special symbol determination is executed, and symbol variation display is started (see FIG. 27E).

  On the other hand, when the production pattern of the push icon change production is internally selected such that the display color of the hold icon is maintained by defeating the Robo 1 design, FIGS. 27 (G) and 27 (H). For example, an effect display indicating that the robot 1 symbol is pushed down and pushed down to the robot 2 symbol is performed, and an effect display indicating that the pseudo icon is broken in two and broken. If the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon is lost, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that (see FIG. 27 (I)) and displayed in the holding area 51. The first special symbol determination is performed, and the symbol variation display is started (see FIG. 27J).

In the present embodiment, it is indicated by the display of the hold icon that the first special symbol determination is being held, and the fact that the first special symbol change is being displayed according to the execution of the first special symbol determination Although the case indicated by the icon display will be described, in other embodiments, an LED or the like is used to indicate that the first special symbol determination is suspended or that the first special symbol is being changed. A light emitting element may be used.
For example, four holding lamps indicating the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination are provided, the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination is notified by the number of lighting of the holding lamps, and the color of any one of the holding lamps is changed from white to red, for example When it is determined internally that the robot 1 is to be changed, the robot 1 symbol and the robot 2 symbol with the red aura are pressed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the robot 1 symbol pushes and wins. It is conceivable to perform effect control such as performing the suggestion effect and then changing the color of the holding lamp from white to red.

[Successful production pattern three-pattern pseudo-ream]
FIG. 28 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a 3-design pseudo-ream of a successful performance pattern. As described above with reference to FIG. 21, this three-pattern pseudo-ream is a pseudo-continuous notice effect that is performed using the robot 3 symbols.

  As illustrated in FIG. 28A, for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 28B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation, for example, 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 28C), and after the scroll speed of the decorative symbol in the right column decreases, 3 symbols in the right column. The symbol is scrolled so as to descend slowly (see FIGS. 28D and 28E). Then, when the three symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column (see FIG. 28 (F)), a deformation action is performed in which the right three symbols are to be transformed into Robo 3 symbols (see FIG. 28 (G)). Here, when the transformation is successful, it is suggested that an effect display that the Robo 3 symbols pops out in the middle row is performed and the pseudo continuous notice effect is developed (see FIG. 28 (H)), and the decorative symbols in each row are displayed. Is restarted and the second symbol variation is started (see FIG. 28I).

  In FIG. 28, an effect pattern in which three symbols are slow-fed is illustrated, but when the effect is performed with this effect pattern, the development to the pseudo continuous notice effect is made when the three symbols are pseudo-stopped. Determine. That is, when the three symbols are pseudo-stopped, the three symbols are always transformed into the robot three symbols, which develops into a pseudo continuous notice effect.

  Note that here, the production pattern has been described in which the three symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column and developed into a pseudo-continuous notice effect. However, the three patterns are pseudo-stopped in the left column and developed into a pseudo-continuous notice effect. There is also an effect pattern in which the pattern is pseudo-stopped in the middle row and developed into a pseudo-continuous notice effect.

[3 pattern pseudo-ream of failure production pattern]
FIG. 29 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a three-pattern pseudo-ream of a failure effect pattern. As illustrated in FIG. 29A, for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state in which the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 29B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation, for example, 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 29C), and after the scroll speed of the decorative symbol in the right column decreases, 3 symbols in the right column. The symbol is scrolled so as to descend slowly (see FIGS. 29D and 29E). Then, it appears that 3 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column, and +1 frame slip occurs, and 4 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column (see FIG. 29F). In this way, when an effect is performed with an effect pattern that appears to develop into a pseudo-continuous notice effect but does not develop, the middle symbol is also pseudo-stopped and a loss is reported (see FIGS. 29G and 29H). ). Then, the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold area 51 is executed, and the next symbol change display is started with the hold icon displayed as the icon. (See FIG. 29I).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, regarding the effect pattern in which the three symbols are slow-fed, in addition to the successful effect pattern in which it is determined that the three symbols are pseudo-stopped and developed into a pseudo continuous notice effect, the three symbols are pseudo-stopped. Gase production patterns that do not develop into pseudo-continuous notice productions are prepared. If only the former successful performance pattern is provided, the player will be able to recognize it when it develops into a pseudo-continuous notice effect at the stage where the three-pattern slow-feed starts, and expects to develop into a pseudo-continuous notice effect. This is to prevent the player from having difficulty feeling. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the three symbols will be pseudo-stopped when the slow-feed of the three symbols starts.

[Successful production pattern three-pattern pseudo-ream]
FIG. 30 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a 3-design pseudo-ream of a successful performance pattern. As illustrated in FIG. 30A, for example, when a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started (see FIG. 30B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of symbol variation, for example, 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 30C), and then 4 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column (FIG. 30D). (See Fig. 30 (E)). Then, from this state, a two-design deformation effect that is pseudo-stopped in the middle row is started (see FIG. 30F). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 30 (F), a deformation action is performed in which 2 symbols pseudo-stopped in the middle row are to be deformed to 3 symbols.

  When the transformation from the 2 symbols to the 3 symbols succeeds as a result of such a deformation action, an effect display that pops out to the front of the screen after the 3 symbols in the middle row is transformed into the 3 symbols in the robot. By being performed, development to a pseudo continuous notice effect is suggested (see FIG. 30H). Then, the decorative symbols in each row are restarted, and the second pseudo symbol variation is started (see FIG. 30I). Here, a description will be given of the case where the pseudo-stopped 3 symbols have been successfully transformed into the Robo 3 symbols, and the development into the pseudo-continuous notice effect is confirmed (if the robots cannot be transformed into the Robo 3 symbols, they will not develop into the pseudo-continuous notice effect). However, it may be possible to adopt a configuration in which the development to the pseudo-continuous notice effect is confirmed when the transformation from 2 symbols to 3 symbols is successful.

  Heretofore, with reference to FIG. 28 and FIG. 30, the description has been given of the case where the pseudo-second station is developed by the three-pattern pseudo-run. There is a case where an effect of a 3 symbol pseudo-ream is performed, or an effect of a 7 symbol pseudo-ream described later is performed.

  In addition, here, an explanation has been given of an effect pattern in which 2 symbols are transformed into 3 symbols in the middle row and developed into a pseudo-continuous notice effect. However, an effect in which 2 symbols are transformed into 3 symbols in the left column and evolved into a pseudo-continuous notice effect. There are also provided patterns and production patterns that transform the 2 symbols into 3 symbols in the right column and develop into a pseudo-continuous notice effect.

  Further, the 7-design pseudo-ream described below has a function of confirming the development to the pseudo-third sequence when the 7-design pseudo-sequence is performed during the development from the pseudo first sequence to the pseudo second sequence. In other words, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the 7-pattern pseudo-ream is performed, the pseudo-ream 3 always develops within the same variation. On the other hand, the three-pattern pseudo-relation described here does not have a function for suggesting the development to the pseudo-third ream. For this reason, when the 3 symbol pseudo-run is performed during the development from the pseudo 1st to the pseudo 2nd, the pseudo 3rd may eventually develop within the same variation. In some cases, only the second pseudo-sequence is developed. For this reason, when the 3 symbol pseudo-ream is performed, the reliability with respect to the big hit is lower than when the 7 symbol pseudo-ream is performed.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, there is a case where a pseudo 3 finalized effect using an effect medium different from the decorative symbol is performed. Specifically, for example, it is suggested that the development to the pseudo third series is confirmed by the movement of the first stage acting 71 during the pseudo second series, or a predetermined character is displayed in a specific display mode. Or the number of characters is different from usual (more than usual), suggesting that the development to the pseudo third series is confirmed.

  For this reason, when the 3 symbol pseudo-ream is performed and develops from the pseudo 1st station to the pseudo 2nd station, both the pseudo 3 finalized effect by the first effect actor 71 and the pseudo 3 finalized effect by the character or When either one is combined, the reliability for the jackpot when the 3 symbol pseudo-run is performed becomes the same level as the reliability for the jackpot when the 7 symbol pseudo-run is performed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since a pseudo 3 finalized effect other than the 7 symbol pseudo-ream is prepared, the player was expected to generate the 7 symbol pseudo ream, whereas the 3 symbol pseudo ream Even if it occurs, the game can be enjoyed while expecting that these pseudo three finalized effects are combined. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the player from lowering his sense of expectation for the jackpot when the three symbol pseudo-ream occurs against the player's expectation.

[3 pattern pseudo-ream of failure production pattern]
FIG. 31 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a three-pattern pseudo-ream of a failure effect pattern. As illustrated in FIG. 31 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of holds of the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the holding area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 31B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation, for example, one symbol is pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 31C), and four symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column (see FIG. 31D). Then, two symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row (see FIG. 31E). Then, from this state, a two-designed deformation effect that is pseudo-stopped in the middle row is started (see FIG. 31F). This deformation effect is the same as the deformation effect described above with reference to FIG.

  If the transformation of 2 symbols into 3 symbols fails as a result of such a deformation action, an effect display that returns to 2 symbols without being transformed into 2 symbols is performed and a pseudo continuous notice effect is performed. This suggests that the development of the project has failed (see FIG. 31G). Then, in most cases, the three rows of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a manner showing a losing eye (see FIG. 31 (H)), and the next symbol variation corresponding to the earliest hold icon is started (FIG. 31). (See (I)).

  FIG. 31 illustrates a gasse effect pattern in which 2 symbols cannot be transformed into 3 symbols and does not develop into a pseudo-continuous notice effect. However, 2 symbols are deformed too much to become 4 symbols. There may be a gassing effect pattern that does not develop into a pseudo continuous notice effect.

[5 design suggesting effects suggesting loss]
FIG. 32 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a 5 symbol suggestion effect that suggests a loss. As described above with reference to FIG. 21, the 5 symbols have a function of transforming into a Robo 5 symbol and suggesting a future development destination (a function of executing a 5 symbol suggestion effect). When the 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped to the left column or the right column and the transformation into the robot 5 symbols is successful, the following 5 symbol suggestion effects are executed.

  As illustrated in FIG. 32 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of holds of the first special symbol determination is “3”, it is displayed in the holding area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 32B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation, for example, 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 32C), and a deformation action is started to attempt to transform 5 symbols into ROBO 5 symbols. (See FIG. 32D). Here, when the 5 symbols are successfully transformed into the Robo 5 symbols, the Robo 5 symbols are displayed large on the back side of the decorative symbols of the respective rows that are variably displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5, and The decorative symbols in the left column where the five symbols are located are restarted (see FIGS. 32D and 32E).

  Subsequently, when the effect pattern of the 5 symbol suggestion effect is determined to be an effect pattern that suggests a losing eye, the following effects are performed. That is, an effect display in which the robot 5 symbol attacks the left column by punching is performed, and, for example, two symbols suddenly stop in the left column where the decorative symbol is scrolled at high speed (see FIG. 32F). Next, an effect display in which the ROBO 5 symbols attack the right row by punching is performed, and for example, 6 symbols suddenly stop in the right row where the decorative symbols are scrolled at high speed (see FIG. 32G). Then, an effect display in which the robot 5 symbols attack the middle row by punching is performed, and, for example, the 5 symbols suddenly stop in the middle row where the decorative symbols are scrolled at high speed (see FIG. 32H). As a result, the three rows of decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped at the losing eyes, and then these decorative symbols are completely stopped to notify the losing (see FIG. 32I).

  In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, in order to give an impression that there may be a chance that a big hit will occur, the three even symbols (weak chance eyes) are stopped and displayed as the special symbols are stopped and displayed. A chance eye effect may be performed (see, for example, FIG. 50). On the other hand, in the above-described 5 symbol suggestion effect, two even symbols (2 symbols and 6 symbols in the above example) stop in order as the left symbol and the right symbol, so at least until the odd symbol stops as the middle symbol Can give the player a sense of expectation that the weak chance will stop. That is, even in the case of a 5-symbol suggestion effect that suggests a loss, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the jackpot.

[5 design suggestions that suggest chances]
FIG. 33 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a 5 symbol suggestion effect that suggests a chance eye. For most effects described so far, an effect pattern is set based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, and effect control is performed based on the effect pattern. On the other hand, the chance eye effect described below and the icon change effect for the hold icon described above are the results of prior determination performed prior to the first special symbol determination in a state where the first special symbol determination is suspended. An effect pattern may be set based on the effect pattern, and effect control may be performed based on the effect pattern.

  Here, the chance eye effect is displayed during the suspension of the first special symbol determination by displaying the decorative symbols in a specific combination when notifying that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”. This effect suggests that there is a possibility that there is a thing judged to be “big hit”.

  As illustrated in FIG. 33 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of holds of the first special symbol determination is “3”, it is displayed in the holding area 51. The first hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 33B). FIG. 33B illustrates a state in which the display mode of the earliest hold icon is changed by the icon change effect.

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation, for example, 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 33 (C)), and a deformation action is started in which the 5 symbols are transformed into Robo 5 symbols. (See FIG. 33D). Here, when the 5 symbol has been successfully transformed into the Robo 5 symbol, the Robo 5 symbol is displayed large on the back side of the decorative symbol of each row that is variably displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. The decorative symbols in the left column where the symbols are located are restarted (see FIGS. 33D and 33E).

  Subsequently, when the effect pattern of the 5 symbol suggestion effect is determined to be the effect pattern suggesting the chance eye, the following effects are performed. That is, an effect display in which the robot 5 symbol attacks the left column by punching is performed, and for example, one symbol suddenly stops in the left column where the decorative symbol is scrolled at a high speed (see FIG. 33F). Next, an effect display in which the ROBO 5 symbols attack the right row by punching is performed, and for example, 9 symbols suddenly stop in the right row where the decorative symbols are scrolled at high speed (see FIG. 33G). Then, an effect display in which the robot 5 symbol attacks the middle row by punching is performed, and, for example, the 5 symbols suddenly stop in the middle row where the decorative symbol is scrolled at high speed (see FIG. 33H). As a result, the medium chance eyes formed by the odd numbers in which the three rows of decorative symbols do not include the seven symbols are in a pseudo-stopped state. Here, in addition to the medium chance chance, the chance eyes include the above-described weak chance eyes and the strong chance eyes described later. The weak chance is a chance to give the player a sense of expectation that may be a big hit. The medium chance is a chance that suggests that the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-determination result is developed into a reach production of, for example, a normal reach or more by the change. The strong chance is a chance that suggests that the first special symbol determination corresponding to the pre-determination result is developed into reach production of SPSP reach or higher (or SP reach or higher) with the fluctuation. Since such three types of chances are prepared, the player can recognize in advance the level of reliability for the jackpot based on which chances stop.

  When the medium chance eye is falsely stopped in this way, after the three emblems emitting green light are displayed for a moment in order to clarify that the medium chance eye is falsely stopped (FIG. 33). (See (I)), the losing eye shown in FIG. 33 (H) completely stops and the losing is notified.

  Here, the case where the occurrence of the medium chance eye is suggested by the 5 symbol suggestion effect has been described, but the chance eye effect for displaying the medium chance eye or the like will be described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 50 to 56.

  In addition, although FIG. 33 demonstrated the case where the 5 symbol suggestion effect which stops a middle chance eye based on the prior determination result with respect to a 1st special symbol determination was demonstrated, as a chance eye failure effect based on a prior determination result, FIG. Based on the above, it is possible to perform a 5-symbol suggestion effect that suggests a loss similar to that described above. That is, based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination instead of the determination result of the first special symbol determination, a 5 symbol suggestion effect suggesting a loss may be performed as one aspect of the chance eye effect. .

  In this case, based on the preliminary determination result, only the 5 symbol suggestion effect that suggests the loss is performed, or the 5 symbol suggestion effect that suggests the loss as the chance eye failure effect is performed in the next change after the weak chance eye effect is performed. It is conceivable to produce a chance eye.

[5 design suggesting effects suggesting development to specific reach effects]
FIG. 34 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of a 5 symbol suggestion effect that suggests development to a specific reach effect. As exemplified in FIG. 34 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 34B). FIG. 34B illustrates a state in which the hold icon whose display mode has changed due to the icon change effect has moved to the region 52 as the icon.

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of symbol variation, for example, 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 34 (C)), and a deformation action is started to transform these 5 symbols into Robo 5 symbols. (See FIG. 34D). Here, when the 5 symbol has been successfully transformed into the Robo 5 symbol, the Robo 5 symbol is displayed large on the back side of the decorative symbol of each row that is variably displayed at the center of the liquid crystal screen 5. The decorative symbols in the left column where the symbols are located are restarted (see FIGS. 34D and 34E).

  Subsequently, when the effect pattern of the 5 symbol suggestion effect is determined to be the effect pattern suggesting the development to the specific reach effect, the following effects are performed. That is, an effect display in which the ROBO 5 symbol attacks the left column by punching is performed, and the left panel on which, for example, the letter “N” is drawn in the left column where the decorative symbol is scrolling at high speed suddenly stops (FIG. 34). (See (F)). Next, an effect display in which the ROBO 5 symbol attacks the right column by punching is performed, and the right panel in which, for example, the letter “T” is drawn in the right column where the decorative symbol is scrolled at high speed, suddenly stops (FIG. 34 (G)). Then, an effect display in which the ROBO 5 symbol attacks the middle row by punching is performed, and the middle panel in which, for example, the letters “ES” are drawn in the middle row where the decorative symbol has been scrolled at high speed suddenly stops (FIG. 34). (See (H)). As a result, one plate written “NEST” is completed, suggesting the development to the specific reach production, and developing to the specific reach production (see FIG. 34 (I)).

[7-pattern pseudo-ream]
35 and 36 are screen views showing a specific example of the 7-pattern pseudo-ream. As described above with reference to FIG. 21, this 7-pattern pseudo-ream is a pseudo-continuous notice effect performed using the Robo 7-pattern.

  As exemplified in FIG. 35 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of holds of the first special symbol determination is “3”, it is displayed in the holding area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 35B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of symbol variation, for example, two symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 35C), and nine symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column (see FIG. 35D). When the seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row (see FIG. 35E), it is determined that the pseudo-continuous notice effect develops to at least the pseudo third series. When 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row, the 7 symbols are transformed into Robo 7 symbols (see FIG. 35 (F)), and the effect display that the deformed Robo 7 symbols pops out in the center of the screen Is carried out, and it is suggested that it develops to a pseudo second-line symbol variation (see FIG. 35G). Then, the decorative symbols in each row are restarted, and the second symbol variation starts (see FIG. 35H).

  FIG. 35 illustrates an effect pattern in which 7 symbols pseudo-stopped in the middle row are transformed into Robo 7 symbols. As described above, 7 symbols pseudo-stopped must be successfully transformed into Robo 7 symbols. Then, the symbol variation after the pseudo second series is performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a gaze effect pattern that does not develop into a pseudo-continuous notice effect by pseudo-stopping 8 symbols without pseudo-stopping 7 symbols in the middle row is also prepared.

  When the pseudo second symbol change is started as described above, for example, four symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 35I), and eight symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column (FIG. 36A). )reference). And here, since it has been decided that the pseudo-third will develop, 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row (see FIG. 36 (B)), and the 7 symbols perform a deformation action to become Robo 7 symbols. Deformation (see FIGS. 36C and 36D). This suggests the development of a pseudo third series.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (D), when an effect display is performed such that seven symbols pop out toward the front, the decorative symbols in each row restart and develop into a pseudo third series (see FIG. 36 (E)). ). Then, for example, two symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 36 (F)), and then two symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column, and reach is established (see FIG. 36 (G)). Thereafter, for example, the SPSP reach effect is developed (see FIG. 36 (H)), and when it is determined that the game is a big hit at the start of symbol variation, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that (FIG. 36). (See (I)).

  Up to this point, the case has been described where 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row and developed into 7 symbols pseudo-run. However, when 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right row, the following effects are performed.

[Seven design suggestions for successful performance patterns]
FIG. 37 is a screen diagram illustrating a specific example of the 7-suggesting effect of the successful effect pattern. The 7 symbol suggestion effect is an suggestion effect that suggests whether or not the 7 symbols pseudo-stopped in the right column are transformed into the Robo 7 symbol to shift to a special effect mode called a turbo zone.

  As exemplified in FIG. 37 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started (see FIG. 37B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of symbol variation, for example, two symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 37C), and seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column (see FIG. 37D). . The 7 symbols pseudo-stopped in the right column are subjected to a deformation action to be transformed into Robo 7 symbols (see FIG. 37 (E)), and when the transformation is successful, an effect display is performed such that Robo 7 symbols pops out in the center of the screen. (See FIG. 37F). Subsequently, the third effect role 73 located obliquely above and to the right of the liquid crystal screen 5 moves to a position that covers a part of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 37G). Then, as the effective period of the effect button 26 is started, a button image imitating the effect button 26 and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed to prompt the player to operate the effect button 26. (See FIG. 37H). On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 26 within the effective period, the third effect actor 73 performs a predetermined deformation operation, thereby suggesting a transition to the turbo zone which is the special effect mode ( See FIG. 37 (I)).

  Although not shown in FIG. 37, the SPSP reach effect is always performed when the seven symbols pseudo-stopped in the right column are successfully transformed into the robot 7 symbols. For this reason, as illustrated in FIG. 37, when the robot 7 is successfully transformed before the reach is established, the SPSP reach effect is developed after the reach is established. Further, for example, when the 7 symbol suggestion effect illustrated in FIG. 37 is performed during the SP reach effect and the transformation into the robot 7 symbol is successful, the SP reach effect is subsequently developed to the SPSP reach effect. .

[7 design suggesting effects of the first failure effect pattern]
FIG. 38 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of 7 symbol suggestion effects of a failure effect pattern. As exemplified in FIG. 38 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 38B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of symbol variation, for example, two symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 38C), and seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column (see FIG. 38D). . The 7 symbols pseudo-stopped in the right column are subjected to a deformation action to be transformed into Robo 7 symbols (see FIG. 38 (E)), and when the transformation is successful, an effect display is performed such that Robo 7 symbols pops out in the center of the screen. (See FIG. 38F). Subsequently, in the same manner as described above with reference to FIGS. 37 (G) and 37 (H), the third effector 73 moves to a predetermined position covering a part of the liquid crystal screen 5 (see FIG. 38 (G)). ) A button image and a gauge image are displayed as the effective period starts (see FIG. 38H).

  Here, when it is determined in advance that the transition to the turbo zone, which is the special effect mode, is internally determined in advance, the third effect actor 73 returns to the initial position without being deformed in accordance with the button operation during the effective period. (See FIGS. 38 (H) and (I)). Then, the robot 7 symbol located at the center of the screen is transformed into a car 7 symbol, suggesting the development of SPSP reach production (see FIG. 38 (I)).

  As described above with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, the SPSP reach is performed regardless of whether or not the third effect actor 73 succeeds in the deformation after the 7 symbols pseudo-stopped in the right column are transformed into the Robo symbols. Develop into production. For this reason, it can be said that the 7 symbols pseudo-stopped in the right column themselves are transformed into the 7 robot designs themselves. And since these 7 symbols are displayed in a state of higher visibility than other normal display decorations like 3 symbols, the player's jackpot is displayed by displaying 7 symbols on the screen. It is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation for.

[7 design suggesting effects of second failure effect pattern]
FIG. 39 is a screen diagram showing another specific example of the 7 symbol suggestion effect of the failure effect pattern. As illustrated in FIG. 39 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 39B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of symbol variation, for example, two symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 39C), and seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column (see FIG. 39D). . The 7 symbols pseudo-stopped in the right column are subjected to a deformation action to be transformed into Robo 7 symbols (see FIG. 39E). Here, for example, when it is determined in advance at the start of symbol variation that the SPSP reach will not be developed, 7 symbols fail to transform into Robo 7 symbols, and the 7 symbols in the normal display mode are displayed again in the right column. (See FIG. 39F). Then, these 7 symbols slide by one frame and 8 symbols are sent to the right column, and the losing eyes are falsely stopped (see FIGS. 39 (G) and (I)), and finally the losing is notified (see FIG. 39). 39 (I)).

[9 design roulette production]
40 and 41 are screen views showing specific examples of 9-design roulette effects. This 9 symbol roulette effect is a roulette effect that occurs when 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped in any two of the three columns as described above with reference to FIG. It suggests development.

  As illustrated in FIG. 40 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 40B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation, for example, 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column and 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row (see FIG. 40C). Unlike the mode of FIG. 40C, for example, there are cases where 9 symbols are falsely stopped in the left and right columns, but in either case, reach is not established, and the 9 symbols that are falsely stopped are not shown. The deformation action is performed to transform the robot into 9 symbols (see FIG. 40D). The two Robo 9 designs transformed into the Robo design in this way are located on both sides of the screen of the liquid crystal screen 5, respectively, and in this state, the contents of the roulette are suggested. Here, a blue panel on which characters “!?” Are drawn is displayed as the first panel (see FIG. 40E), and then “development” is drawn on the second panel. The same blue panel is displayed (see FIG. 40 (F)), and then the third panel is displayed with a green panel with the letters “CHANCE” (see FIG. 40 (G)). Finally, a red panel on which characters “TURBO” are drawn is displayed as the fourth panel (see FIG. 40H).

  The blue panel on which the letters “!?” Are drawn is a panel for so-called gasses that suggests that it does not develop into an effect that suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high. Since the panel on which the letters “!?” Are drawn is blue, the player may recognize that the reliability of the jackpot is extremely low when this panel is stopped as a result of the 9-design roulette effect. Is possible. When the blue panel on which the character “!?” Is drawn stops, in most cases, for example, a loss is notified without developing into a reach effect.

  The green panel on which the letters “CHANCE” are drawn is a panel that suggests that the reliability for jackpot is slightly higher (for example, about 10%) than when the blue panel is stopped. When the green panel on which the characters “CHANCE” are drawn is stopped as a result of the nine symbol roulette effect, reach is achieved and reach effect is performed. This green panel does not suggest that the reliability for the jackpot is very low, but suggests that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively low. For this reason, when this green panel stops, it is easy to develop a reach production with low reliability such as a normal reach production, but it is difficult to develop into a highly reliable reach production such as an SP reach production or an SPSP reach production. . Therefore, in the fluctuation in which the green panel is stopped and displayed, finally, “losing” is easily notified and “big hit” is not easily notified.

  The red panel on which the letters “TURBO” are drawn is a panel that suggests a transition to a special performance mode called a turbo zone. If the red panel with the letters “TURBO” stopped as a result of the 9-design roulette effect, a highly reliable reach effect such as SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is performed in the state of transition to the turbo zone. After that, the winner will be notified. Since this panel is displayed in red, the player can easily recognize that the current fluctuation is a big hit with a big hit, or that there is a hold with a big win in the hold. it can.

  As described above, in this embodiment, four panels that may stop as a result of roulette are displayed in order, each in a color that suggests a reliability level for the jackpot. Here, the case where the four panels of the combination illustrated in FIG. 40 are displayed in order will be described as an example, but the combination of these four panels is the first special symbol determination performed at the start of symbol variation. This change appropriately according to the determination result, the variation pattern of the first special symbol to be selected, the variation effect pattern of the decorative symbol, and the like.

  When the fourth panel is displayed as illustrated in FIG. 40H, a panel row in which the four panels are continuously written in the vertical direction scrolls at a high speed from top to bottom, and the player A button image and a gauge image that prompt the user to operate the effect button 26 are displayed (see FIG. 40I).

  On the other hand, when the player operates the effect button 26 within the effective period, or when the effective period ends without the effect button 26 being operated, as illustrated in FIG. Therefore, the predetermined panel is stopped and displayed at the center of the screen. This suggests to the player that this is a chance to win.

  After such a roulette effect using two nine symbols is performed, for example, three symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row with the left and right decorative symbols being pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 41B), and the three symbols are deformed. An action is performed to make the player feel that it is a big hit opportunity, by performing an action and transforming it into a Robo 3 symbol and entering a pseudo second symbol variation (FIGS. 41B to 41E). reference).

[Direct development suggestion of SPSP]
FIG. 42 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the SPSP direct development suggesting effect. This SPSP direct development suggestion is produced by stopping the development suggestion symbols described above based on FIG. 22 in all of the left column, the middle column, and the right column, for example, without the normal reach effect or the SP reach effect. This directing suggests direct development.

  As illustrated in FIG. 42 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of the first special symbol determination is “3”, it is displayed in the holding area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 42B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation, for example, 6 symbols that are even symbols in the left column are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 42C). Subsequently, 6 symbols which are even symbols in the right column are stopped in a pseudo manner, and the left 6 symbols perform a predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 42D). Then, the left six symbols that have undergone the predetermined deformation action are deformed into the development suggestion symbols, and the right six symbols also perform the predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 42E).

  Thereafter, for example, 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row (see FIG. 42F), and the 5 symbols also perform a predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 42G). As a result, when the three development suggestion symbols are gathered (see FIG. 42H), here, the development directly develops into the SPSP reach production without the normal reach production or the SP reach production (see FIG. 42I).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, prior to the execution of the SPSP reach effect, the display mode of the plurality of decorative symbols during the variable display is controlled to a display mode that suggests the execution of the SPSP reach effect. There is a case. Specifically, a display object that suggests execution of SPSP reach production (here, three development suggestion symbols on which characters “transfer” are drawn) is formed by a plurality of decorative symbols.

  Since execution of the SPSP reach effect is suggested here, a display object that suggests execution of the SPSP reach effect is formed by a plurality of decorative symbols (here, the development suggestion symbol which is a special symbol). On the other hand, when the effect of the special effect mode called the dark side zone is executed as exemplified in FIG. 43 (I), for example, the execution of the effect of the special effect mode is suggested prior to the execution. Therefore, a display object in which the middle symbol is the ROBO 8 symbol and other even symbols are arranged on the right and left sides thereof may be formed (see FIG. 43H). In addition, when the SPSP reach production development production effect that promotes the development to the SPSP reach production is executed, in order to suggest execution of the SPSP reach production development production display, three vehicle symbols are displayed side by side. An object may be formed (see FIG. 45H). In addition, when the specific reach effect illustrated in FIG. 47 (I) is executed, one plate written “NEST” is formed to suggest the execution of the specific reach effect prior to the execution. (See FIG. 47H).

  In addition, in FIG. 42, the case where 6 symbols pseudo-stopped in the left column and the right column are transformed into development-suggesting symbols has been described as an example, but each of the 6 symbols is pseudo-stopped and transformed into development-suggesting symbols. This is because the SPSP reach effect is performed in a state where reach is established with 6 symbols after the development suggestion symbols are aligned (see FIGS. 42H and 42). However, the decorative symbol transformed into the development suggestion symbol does not necessarily match the reach symbol, and a decorative symbol different from the reach symbol may be transformed into the development suggestion symbol. Also, the two symbols to be pseudo-stopped are not necessarily the same symbol, and may be different decorative symbols. That is, the even number symbols other than the six symbols may be similarly transformed into the development suggestion symbols. In addition, here, the case where 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row and transformed into the development suggestion symbol has been described as an example. There can be.

  42, the case where all the three decorative symbols are transformed into the development suggestion symbol has been described. However, the failure effect of the SPSP direct development suggestion effect that ends without progressing to the SPSP reach production without the three development suggestion symbols being displayed. Patterns are also available. For example, a failure effect pattern is prepared in which a decorative design that has been pseudo-stopped first fails to be transformed into a development-suggesting design, and finally the discoloration stops and is displayed to notify “losing”. In addition, for example, although the decoration pattern that was first pseudo-stopped was successfully transformed into a development-suggestion pattern, the decoration pattern that was subsequently pseudo-stopped failed to be transformed into a development-suggestion pattern, and finally the break eyes were stopped. In addition, a failure effect pattern in which “losing” is notified is also prepared. In addition, although the decoration pattern that was initially pseudo-stopped and the decoration pattern that was subsequently pseudo-stopped were successfully transformed into the development-suggestion pattern, the last-stop-decoration decoration pattern failed to be transformed into the development-suggestion pattern, and reach was established. A failure production pattern is also prepared. If a reach is established with this failure production pattern, a loss will be notified immediately after the reach is established without developing into a normal reach production, a loss will be announced at the end of the normal reach production after developing a normal reach production, or a normal reach production To develop other reach productions. In any case, since it is the reach development from the failure production pattern, most of the time, finally, the loss is notified.

[Success production pattern suggesting zone entry]
FIG. 43 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the zone entry suggestion effect of the successful effect pattern. This zone entry suggestion effect is produced in the special effect mode called dark side zone by stopping the robot 8 symbol that is the enemy boss in the middle row and the other even number robot symbols in the left and right rows. This is an effect that suggests whether or not it will be executed. Here, a case will be described as an example in which the transition to the dark side zone is performed during the variation display of the first special symbol, and the effect in the dark side zone is terminated due to the symbol variation.

  As illustrated in FIG. 43 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of reserved first special symbol determination is “3”, it is displayed in the reserved area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 43B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of symbol variation, for example, four symbols which are even symbols in the left column are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 43C). Subsequently, two symbols that are even symbols in the right column are stopped in a pseudo manner, and the four symbols on the left perform a predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 43D). Then, the left four symbols that have undergone the predetermined deformation action are deformed into the robot 4 symbols, and the right two symbols also perform the predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 43E).

  In this example, 4 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column and 2 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column. However, in the left and right columns, other even symbols other than 8 symbols are pseudo-stopped. Then, it may be transformed into a robot design.

  Thereafter, 8 symbols representing enemy bosses in the middle row are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 43 (F)), and these 8 symbols also perform a predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 43 (G)). As a result, a display object representing a state in which all three even-numbered symbols including eight symbols are transformed into a robot symbol is formed (see FIG. 43 (H)), and then a dark side zone entry effect is performed (FIG. 43 ( See I)). Since this rush effect is not a reach effect, it is performed in a state where the reach is not formed by the decorative symbols, for example, in a state where three decorative symbols are variably displayed as, for example, the lower right corner of the screen. When the rush effect for the dark side zone is performed in this way, various notice effects are performed in a state where the background image dedicated to the dark side zone is displayed, and reach is finally established, and finally the SP reach effect or SPSP is achieved. The winner will be notified after the reach performance.

  In addition to the pattern illustrated based on FIG. 43, the effect in the dark side zone may be performed across a plurality of symbol variations. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 43 (I), when entering the dark side zone in the middle of the symbol change corresponding to the icon displayed in the area 52, the earliest displayed in the holding area 51 There is a case where the production in the dark side zone is performed until the end of the symbol variation corresponding to the hold icon. In this case, although not shown in the figure, for example, in a state in which three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped as a small symbol in a manner showing a loss, a dark side zone entry effect is performed, and these decorative symbols indicate a loss. After the stop display in the mode, the effect in the dark side zone is continuously performed even in the next change.

  By the way, the reach effect is an effect for causing the player to recognize that this change may be a big hit. On the other hand, the effect in the dark side zone performed across a plurality of changes is an effect that suggests that the final change of these changes is a big hit with a big hit. For this reason, it is not preferable to perform the rush effect in the dark side zone during the symbol fluctuation in which the reach is established and the reach effect is performed. For this reason, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the rush effect is not performed during the symbol variation in which the reachable effect is performed, and the rush effect is performed in the symbol variation in which the reachless effect is performed. .

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, prior to the start of the effect in the special effect mode, the three rows of decorative symbols are controlled so as to indicate the execution of the effect in the special effect mode. May be. Specifically, a display object is formed in which all three even-numbered robot symbols with the middle symbol as the robot 8 symbol are arranged.

[Zone entry suggestion of failure production pattern]
FIG. 44 is a screen diagram illustrating a specific example of the zone entry suggestion effect of the failure effect pattern. 42 and 43, a case has been described in which the display mode of a plurality of decorative symbols during variable display is controlled to a display mode that suggests execution of the specific effect prior to the execution of the specific effect. There is a case where the production of the Gase production pattern is performed, which is pretending to be unrealistic.

  As illustrated in FIG. 44 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 44B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of symbol variation, for example, four symbols that are even symbols in the left column are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 44C). Subsequently, two symbols that are even symbols in the right column stop in a pseudo manner, and the four symbols on the left perform a predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 44D). Then, the left four symbols that have undergone the predetermined deformation action are transformed into the robot four symbols, and the right two symbols also perform the predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 44E).

  In this example, 4 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column and 2 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column. However, in the left and right columns, other even symbols other than 8 symbols are pseudo-stopped. Then, it may be transformed into a robot design.

  Thereafter, for example, 8 symbols representing enemy bosses in the middle row move from above at a low speed, and a roaring effect is given to instigate the player's expectation that the 8 symbols in the middle row are pseudo-stopped (FIG. 44). (See (F)). In the success pattern effect shown in FIG. 43, the illustration of the roaring effect is omitted, but the same roaring effect is performed prior to the pseudo stop of the middle eight symbols shown in FIG. 43 (F).

  Here, if the effect pattern that suggests not shifting to the special effect mode (here, the dark side zone) is set as the effect pattern of the zone entry suggestion effect, for example, it is likely to stop falsely in the middle row One frame slip occurs for 8 symbols, and 9 symbols in the middle row are pseudo-stopped, and the formation of objects arranged in the order of Robo even symbol, Robo 8 symbol, Robo even symbol from the left has failed. Is displayed (see FIG. 44G). After that, the even symbols in the left and right columns that have been transformed into the ROBO symbols are returned to the normal display mode (see FIG. 44 (H)), and for example, it is notified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “lost”. The decorative design is stopped and displayed in the display mode (see FIG. 44 (I)).

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the gaze effect pattern is also prepared for the zone entry suggestion effect. For example, if a roaring effect that starts the player's expectation for the 8 symbols being pseudo-stopped in the middle row described above is started, and if only a successful effect pattern is prepared, it will be thrilling to enter the special effect mode. The player will have difficulty feeling. On the other hand, by performing the above-mentioned roaring effect, the player has a sense of expectation for shifting to the special effect mode at least until a display object that suggests a zone entry is formed. You can enjoy the game.

[Production of cars]
45 and 46 are screen views showing a specific example of a vehicle-alignment effect. This vehicle alignment effect is an SPSP reach development effect that suggests whether or not it will develop into an SPSP reach effect by forming a display object (see FIG. 45 (H)) representing a state in which three vehicle symbols are arranged. This is an effect that suggests execution.

  As illustrated in FIG. 45 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of holds of the first special symbol determination is “3”, it is displayed in the holding area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 45B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of symbol variation, for example, five symbols, which are odd symbols, are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 45C). Subsequently, 9 odd symbols in the right column are pseudo-stopped, and the left 5 symbols perform a predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 45D). Then, the left 5 symbols that have undergone the predetermined deformation action are deformed into the car 5 symbol, and the right 9 symbols also perform the predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 45E).

  Here, an example is described in which 5 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column and 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column. However, in the left and right columns, other even symbols other than 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped. In some cases, it may be transformed into a car symbol.

  Thereafter, for example, one symbol which is an odd symbol in the middle row is pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 45F), and this one symbol also performs a predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 45G). When it is determined in advance that the execution of the SPSP reach development effect is suggested by the vehicle matching effect, one symbol has been successfully transformed into one vehicle symbol, and the three vehicle symbols are arranged side by side. A display object is formed (see FIG. 45H). As a result, execution of the SPSP reach development effect is suggested, and then the SPSP reach development effect is developed (see FIG. 45I).

  Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, prior to the start of the SPSP reach development effect, the three rows of decorative symbols are controlled in a display mode that suggests execution of the SPSP reach development effect. There is a case. Specifically, a display object in which three vehicle symbols are arranged is formed. For this reason, the player can easily recognize that the SPSP reach development effect is produced by looking at the state in which the three vehicle symbols are arranged.

  Although it is not shown in the figure, for example, a gusset effect pattern in which even numbers in the right column are not odd numbers, but even numbers are pseudo-stopped, and decorative patterns in the right column do not transform into car symbols, or odd numbers in the middle row There is also a gaze effect pattern etc. in which the odd symbol does not transform into a car symbol even though the symbol has stopped.

  The SPSP reach development effect starting with the effect display illustrated in FIG. 45 (I) is specifically as follows. That is, following the effect display indicating the start of the SPSP reach development effect illustrated in FIG. 45 (I), for example, the flow of subsequent effects branches in a direction in which an enemy is found or ends in the absence of finding an enemy. A predetermined branch effect indicating that the process is to be performed is performed (see FIG. 46A).

  Here, when the story progresses in the direction of finding an enemy, for example, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), an effect display showing a state of successful discovery of the enemy is performed, and a battle effect with the enemy is performed. The SPSP reach production is developed (see FIG. 46C).

  On the other hand, when the story progresses in the direction that ends without being able to find the enemy, for example, as shown in FIG. An effect display in which the decorative symbol moves so as to fall from above is performed (see FIG. 46F). Then, these three decorative symbols stop on the screen, and it is notified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing” (see FIG. 46G).

[Specific reach development suggestion]
FIG. 47 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the specific reach development suggesting effect. This specific reach development suggestion effect is obtained by stopping the left panel, the middle panel, and the right panel described above with reference to FIG. It is an effect that suggests execution of a specific reach effect by completing it.

  As exemplified in FIG. 47 (A), for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state where the number of reserved symbols for the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the reserved area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 47B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation, for example, two symbols that are even symbols in the left column are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 47C). Subsequently, 6 symbols which are even symbols in the right column are pseudo-stopped, and the left 2 symbols perform a predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 47D). Then, the left two symbols that have undergone the predetermined deformation action are deformed to the left panel on which the character “N” is drawn, and the right six symbols also perform the predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 47E).

  Thereafter, the 6 symbols on the right where the transformation action was performed are transformed into the right panel on which the letter “T” is drawn, and for example, 4 symbols which are even symbols in the middle row are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 47F). ). These four symbols also perform a predetermined deformation action (see FIG. 47G), and when three panels are aligned, one plate is locked (see FIG. 47H). This suggests the development of specific reach production. After the specific reach development suggesting effect is thus performed, the specific reach effect is started (see FIG. 47 (I)).

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, prior to the execution of the specific reach effect, the display mode of the plurality of decorative symbols during the variable display is controlled to the display mode that suggests the execution of the specific reach effect. There is a case. Specifically, one plate written “NEST” is formed by a plurality of decorative symbols. For this reason, the player can easily recognize that the character “NEST” has been developed and that it will develop into a specific reach production.

  In FIG. 47, the case where two symbols pseudo-stopped in the left column are transformed into the left panel and six symbols pseudo-stopped in the right column are transformed into the right panel has been described as an example. However, other even symbols are pseudo-stopped. May be transformed into a left panel or a right panel. In addition, the symbol that stops in the middle row and deforms to the middle panel may be a decorative symbol other than the four symbols.

  Up to this point, description has been made with respect to effects in which execution of a specific effect is suggested by the formation of a predetermined display object with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47. A development suggestion symbol is displayed (see FIG. 42 (H)), and when moving to the dark side zone, the middle symbol is the ROBO 8 symbol and other even number ROBO symbols are displayed on the left and right sides thereof (FIG. 43 ( H)). When the SPSP development effect is executed, three vehicle symbols are displayed (see FIG. 45 (H)), and when the specific reach effect is executed, a plate with “NEST” is displayed. (See FIG. 47H). As described above, in the suggestion effect performed using the three decorative symbols, the display objects to be formed are different from each other depending on the type of effect performed thereafter. For this reason, the player can easily identify which effect will be executed thereafter based on the type of display object to be formed.

[Car design smooth production]
48 and 49 are screen views showing specific examples of the car symbol slip effect. This car design slip production is the odd design of 1 symbol, 5 symbols, or 9 symbols that have been pseudo-stopped in the middle row at the time of normal reach loss, transforms into a car symbol and attacks the even symbol in the right column, If it succeeds in sliding, the effect is to develop into a 3 symbol pseudo-ream or 7 symbol pseudo-ream.

  As illustrated in FIG. 48A, for example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss in a state in which the number of holds for the first special symbol determination is “3”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the hold area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 48B).

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation, for example, the four symbols that are even symbols in the left column are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 48C), and the four symbols that are the same even symbols are subsequently displayed in the right column. The simulation is stopped (see FIG. 48D). As a result, reach is established, and a predetermined normal reach effect is performed, although not shown in the figure. Here, when 1 symbol, 5 symbols, or 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row at the end of normal reach, the following effect display may be performed.

  That is, for example, when 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row (see FIG. 48 (E)), the 9 symbols are subjected to a predetermined deformation action to be transformed into a car symbol (see FIG. 48 (F)), and the transformation is successful. In such a case, the car 9 symbol is displayed in the middle row (see FIG. 48G). When the car 9 symbol is displayed in the middle row in this way, an effect display for attacking the even symbol (4 symbols in the example shown in FIG. 48) in which the car 9 symbol is pseudo-stopped in the middle row is displayed. (See FIG. 48H). When the car 9 symbol succeeds in sliding the four symbols in the right row downward, the decorative symbols in the middle row and the right row are restarted to start high-speed scrolling (see FIG. 48 (I)).

  When high-speed scrolling of the middle symbol and the right symbol is started, for example, immediately after that, seven symbols suddenly stop in the middle row (see FIG. 49A). Thus, when 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row, the pseudo-continuous notice effect develops at least until the third series. For this reason, the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 49 (B)), and after that, a deforming action (not shown) that transforms the 7 symbols into the Robo 7 symbols is performed, which develops to the pseudo second consecutive symbol variation. (See FIG. 49C).

  FIG. 49 illustrates the case where 7 symbols stop and develop into a 7 symbol pseudo-run. However, there are cases where 3 symbols stop and develop into a 3 symbol pseudo-run.

  By the way, as illustrated in FIG. 48, the development to the pseudo continuous notice effect cannot be expected unless the 3 symbols or 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, based on FIGS. As described above, an odd symbol stopped in the middle row is transformed into a vehicle symbol, and the right symbol is slid, whereby a pattern that develops into a seven symbol pseudo-series or a three symbol pseudo-series is prepared. For this reason, even if the 3 symbols or 7 symbols do not stop on the liquid crystal screen 5, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the development of the pseudo continuous notice effect.

  Although not shown in the figure, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it appears that an odd symbol is pseudo-stopped in the middle row, and the even symbol stops and does not develop into a car symbol slip effect. In addition, there are prepared failure effect patterns and the like in which the odd symbol pseudo-stopped in the middle row has been successfully transformed into a car symbol, but the right even symbol cannot be slid and does not develop into a pseudo continuous notice effect.

[Chance Eye Direction]
Hereinafter, the chance eye effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 56. Here, FIGS. 50 to 56 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of chance eye effects. The chance eye effect is a “big hit” during the suspension of the first special symbol determination by displaying the decorative symbols in a specific combination when notifying that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”. It is an effect that suggests that there is a possibility that there is something judged to be.

  In the present embodiment, there are three types of chances displayed by this chance eye effect: weak chances, medium chances, and strong chances.

  The weak chance is a chance that suggests that there is a relatively low possibility that there is a thing determined to be a “big hit” in the suspension of the first special symbol determination. In other words, this is a chance to give the player an impression that the change in the prefetch target may be a chance. The weak chance in this embodiment is a losing eye composed of three even symbols (see, for example, FIG. 50G). If only the weak chance is displayed before the change of the prefetch target, reach may be established in the change of the prefetch target, but it is difficult to achieve reach. Further, even if reach is established due to the change in the prefetch target, only the low-reliability reach effect is performed, and in most cases, the loss is notified.

  The medium chance is an opportunity that suggests that there is a medium possibility that there is a thing determined to be a “big hit” among the suspensions of the first special symbol determination. The medium chance eye in the present embodiment is a losing eye composed of three odd symbols not including 7 symbols (see, for example, FIG. 52G). This middle chance is a chance that suggests that the development of a reach production more than the normal reach production, for example, due to the change of the prefetch target. For this reason, when the middle chance is displayed before the change of the prefetch target, reach is always established during the change of the prefetch target, and the reach effect indicating that the reliability for the big hit is medium (for example, SP) Reach production). When the medium chance is displayed, a highly reliable reach effect such as an SPSP reach effect may be performed during the change of the prefetch target. For this reason, it is possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation for jackpot by displaying the medium chance before the change of the prefetch target.

  The strong chance is a chance that suggests that there is a relatively high possibility that there is an item determined to be a “big hit” in the suspension of the first special symbol determination. The strong chance in this embodiment is a losing eye composed of three odd symbols including seven symbols (see, for example, FIG. 54G). This strong chance is a chance that suggests that development of a highly reliable reach production (for example, a SPSP reach production or a reach production performed in a state where the reach is established with 7 symbols) is developed by the change of the prefetch target. For this reason, if a strong chance is displayed before the change in the prefetch target, a reach is always established during the change in the prefetch target, and a high-reliability reach indicating that the reliability for the jackpot is relatively high. Production is performed. For this reason, by displaying strong chances before the start of pre-reading changes, it is possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation for jackpots, and to give the player the impression that a big chance is approaching. Can be given.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, chances may be displayed a plurality of times before the change of the prefetch target starts. For example, the weak chance eye may be displayed during the change two times before the prefetch target, and the weak chance eye may be displayed during the change one time before the prefetch target. In addition, the weak chance eye may be displayed during the change two times before the prefetch target, and the medium chance eye (or strong chance eye) may be displayed during the change one time before the prefetch target. In addition, the middle chance eye may be displayed during the change two times before the prefetch target, and the middle chance eye (or strong chance eye) may be displayed during the change one time before the prefetch target. Here, the case where the chance eye is displayed using two consecutive symbol fluctuations is illustrated, but the chance eye 3 is displayed before the pre-reading target fluctuation starts using three or four fluctuations. It may be displayed once or four times.

  As described above, when the chance item is displayed a plurality of times before the change of the prefetch target starts, the chance item displayed in the previous change of the prefetch target indicates the reliability of the jackpot of the change of the prefetch target. Have a role. For this reason, when a weak chance or a medium chance is displayed, the player can enjoy the chance eye while expecting that a strong chance will be displayed before the change of the prefetch target starts. .

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the first special symbol determination is suspended, a pre-determination process (prefetching process) for performing the same determination as the first special symbol determination prior to the first special symbol determination is performed. Done. Specifically, when the first special symbol determination is performed, whether or not it is determined as “big hit”, and what is the variation pattern of the first special symbol that is variably displayed according to the execution of the first special symbol determination A process for pre-determining whether the variation pattern is selected or the like is performed. Then, based on the result of the prior determination, it is determined whether or not to execute the chance eye effect, and in the case of executing the chance eye effect, what kind of effect pattern to execute the chance eye effect is determined. The chance eye direction is performed based on the above.

  By the way, the chance eye display is performed by using the fluctuation of reachless without reach effect. For this reason, if it is determined to perform the chance eye effect based on the pre-determination target pre-determination result, it is determined whether or not all the effects performed by the symbol variation digested before the pre-read target variation are non-reach effects. If it is determined that a variation in which at least one effect with reach is performed is included, control is performed such that the chance eye effect is not executed.

  Whether or not to execute the chance eye effect can be determined by performing the following processing. Specifically, if there is a pre-determined result that can be the execution target of a chance eye effect, does it include a product that has a reach effect with respect to the symbol variation that is digested before the variation of the look-ahead target? If it is determined whether or not it is included, it is determined not to execute the chance eye effect, and if it is determined that it is not included, it is determined to execute the chance eye effect.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the combination indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination. There are cases in which chances are displayed both when the decorative pattern is displayed in a false stop state and when it is displayed in a stop state. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the case where the three decorative symbols are completely stopped from the case where these decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped, the fact that the three decorative symbols are completely stopped is “main stop”. Sometimes called.

(Pattern with consecutive weak chances)
50 and 51 are screen diagrams showing a specific example of a chance eye effect in which weak chance eyes are displayed continuously for two fluctuations. FIG. 50A illustrates a state in which the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in a state where the number of reserved first special symbol determination is “3”. In such a situation, for example, the above-described pre-determination process is executed at the time of winning the start opening for the first special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold icon in the hold area 51, and based on the pre-determination result When it is determined to perform a chance eye effect that displays weak chances for two consecutive fluctuations, the following effect is performed.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 50A, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is lost, the earliest displayed in the holding area 51 The held icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 50B). Along with this, the prefetch target hold icon that is the target of the above-described pre-determination process moves from the position indicating the third hold to the position indicating the second hold (FIG. 50 ( A) and (B)).

  As described above, when the display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the left-side decorative symbol, the right-side decorative symbol, and the middle-row decorative symbol are simulated on the liquid crystal screen 5 in order or almost simultaneously. It stops and the three decorative symbols are in a quasi-stopped state. At this time, since it is determined in advance that the weak chance is displayed, for example, “266” is pseudo-stopped as illustrated in FIG.

  In this way, when it is determined in advance that the weak chance eye is to be pseudo-stopped, 7 symbols are included, indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the current symbol variation is “losing” A losing eye composed of three even-numbered symbols is falsely stopped as a weak chance eye.

  FIG. 50C illustrates the weak chance of the combination “266”. For example, “246”, “248”, “268”, “426”, “428”, “862” In other cases, the weak chances of other even-numbered symbol combinations are falsely stopped. That is, the weak chance indicates “losing”, and any combination may be used as long as it does not include 7 symbols and is composed of three even symbols.

  By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 21, the even symbols used as weak chances are all gray decorative symbols. In this embodiment, since there are four types of even symbols of 2 symbols, 4 symbols, 6 symbols, and 8 symbols, there are considerably many combinations of even symbols that stop as chances. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player cannot recognize it as a weak chance by simply stopping the three even symbols.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the following effect display is performed in order to easily notify the player that the weak chance has stopped. That is, following the display of the weak chance illustrated in FIG. 50C, three small blue emblems are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and an effect display for emitting blue light of these emblems and the periphery thereof is performed (FIG. 50). 50 (D)). Then, the three decorative symbols of the same combination as the pseudo-stop as a weak chance are actually stopped (see FIG. 50E), and the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the current symbol variation Is reported to be “lost”.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an effect display indicating that the weak chance eye has stopped is performed between the time when the weak chance eye is temporarily stopped and the time when the weak stop eye is stopped. It is possible to easily recognize that the weak chance eyes have stopped. As will be described in detail later, such effect display is not limited to weak chance eyes, but is also performed in a different manner with respect to medium chance eyes and strong chance eyes.

  When the even symbol of “266” indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is “lost” is stopped, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold area 51 moves to the area 52. Are displayed as the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started (see FIG. 50F). Accordingly, the pre-read target hold icon, which is the target of the above-described pre-determination process, moves from the position indicating the second hold to the position indicating the first hold (FIG. 50 ( E) and (F)).

  As described above, when the display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the left-side decorative symbol, the right-side decorative symbol, and the middle-row decorative symbol are simulated on the liquid crystal screen 5 in order or almost simultaneously. It stops, and the three decorative symbols are in a pseudo-stopped state (see FIG. 50G). At this time, since it is determined in advance that the weak chance is displayed, for example, “664” is pseudo-stopped as illustrated in FIG.

  When the weak chance eye is pseudo-stopped in this way, an effect display indicating that the weak chance eye has stopped is performed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 50D (see FIG. 50H). An even number of symbols having the same combination as the chance stop that has been pseudo-stopped is actually stopped, and it is notified that the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the current symbol variation is “losing” (FIG. 50 ( I)).

  When the even-numbered symbol “664” indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is “losing” is stopped, as shown in FIG. 50 (I) and FIG. The earliest hold icon (prefetch target hold icon) displayed at 51 is moved to the area 52 and displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started.

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the current symbol variation, for example, 8 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 51 (B)), and 9 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column (FIG. 51 (C )), 4 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row (see FIG. 51 (D)), and then the loss is notified (see FIG. 51 (E)).

  As described above, the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the prefetch target icon is “lost”, and the first special symbol is variably displayed in a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively short. Thus, when the reliability for “big hit” is relatively low, weak chances are easily displayed, and medium chances and strong chances are difficult to display.

(Pattern displaying weak chances and medium chances)
52 and 53 are screen diagrams showing a specific example of the chance eye effect in which the medium chance eye is displayed after the weak chance eye is displayed. FIG. 52A illustrates a state in which the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in a state where the number of reserved first symbol determinations is “3”. In such a situation, for example, the above-described pre-determination process is executed at the time of winning the start opening for the first special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold icon in the hold area 51, and based on the pre-determination result When it is determined that the chance eye effect is displayed after displaying the weak chance eyes, the following effects are performed.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 52A, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the holding area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started (see FIG. 52B). Along with this, the prefetch target hold icon that is the target of the above-described pre-determination process moves from the position indicating the third hold to the position indicating the second hold (FIG. 52 ( A) and (B)).

  As described above, when the display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the left-side decorative symbol, the right-side decorative symbol, and the middle-row decorative symbol are simulated on the liquid crystal screen 5 in order or almost simultaneously. It stops and the three decorative symbols are in a quasi-stopped state. At this time, since it is determined in advance here that the weak chance is displayed, for example, “264” is pseudo-stopped as illustrated in FIG.

  Next, three small blue emblems are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and an effect display for emitting blue light around these emblems and their surroundings is performed (see FIG. 52D). Then, the three decorative symbols of the same combination as the pseudo-stop as a weak chance are actually stopped (see FIG. 52E), and the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the current symbol variation Is reported to be “lost”.

  When the even symbol of “264” indicating that the current determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing” is stopped, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold area 51 moves to the area 52. Are displayed as the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started (see FIG. 52F). Accordingly, the prefetch target hold icon, which is the target of the above-described pre-determination process, moves from the position indicating the second hold to the position indicating the first hold (FIG. 52 ( E) and (F)).

  As described above, when the display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the left-side decorative symbol, the right-side decorative symbol, and the middle-row decorative symbol are simulated on the liquid crystal screen 5 in order or almost simultaneously. It stops and the three decorative symbols are in a pseudo-stopped state (see FIG. 52 (G)). At this time, since it is determined in advance that the middle chance eye is displayed, for example, “159” is pseudo-stopped as illustrated in FIG.

  In this way, when it is determined in advance that the middle chance eye is pseudo-stopped, 7 symbols are included, indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the current symbol variation is “losing” A losing eye composed of three odd odd symbols stops as a medium chance eye.

  In FIG. 52 (G), the middle chance of the combination “159” is illustrated, but other odd number combinations such as “319”, “953”, “135”, and “915” are exemplified. There is a case where the medium chance is falsely stopped. That is, the medium chance indicates a “losing”, and any combination may be used as long as it does not include 7 symbols and is composed of three odd symbols.

  By the way, as illustrated in FIG. 21, a yellow-green 1 symbol, a yellow 3 symbol, a blue 5 symbol, and a vermilion 9 symbol are used for the middle chance, but these odd symbols are mutually connected. The color is different. In addition, since the chance eye effect is performed using the loss fluctuation with a relatively short fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the time for which the chance eye is displayed is also short. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player cannot clearly recognize it as the middle chance eye by simply stopping the three odd symbols that do not include the 7 symbols. The same applies to the case where the three odd symbols indicating the medium chance are stopped.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the following effect display is performed in order to notify the player that the medium chance eye has stopped. That is, following the middle chance display shown in FIG. 52 (G), three medium-sized green emblems are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the emblem and its surroundings emit green light. Is performed (see FIG. 52H). Then, three decorative symbols of the same combination as the pseudo-stop as the middle chance stop are finally stopped (see FIG. 52 (I)), and the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the current symbol variation Is reported to be “lost”.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, an effect display indicating that the middle chance eye has stopped is performed between the time when the middle chance eye is falsely stopped and the time when the middle stop is made. It is possible to easily recognize that the medium chance eyes have stopped. Further, when the effect display for the weak chance eyes and the effect display for the medium chance eyes are compared, the size and color of the emblem and the emission color are different from each other. In the present embodiment, when displaying a medium chance eye, the emblem is displayed in a green color instead of blue, and the visibility of the emblem is improved by displaying the emblem larger than when displaying a weak chance eye. By this, it is suggested to the player that it is a chance. For this reason, it is easy to identify weak chances and medium chances. Here, the visibility of the emblem is changed to make it easier to recognize the middle chance eyes than the weak chance eyes, but for the same purpose, the production sound when the middle chance eyes are displayed is weak chance. A configuration (for example, increasing the volume or outputting a higher-pitched sound) that the player can recognize more easily than the effect sound when the eyes are displayed may be employed.

  When an odd symbol of “159” indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is “lost” is stopped, as shown in FIG. 52 (I) and FIG. 53 (A), the reserved area The earliest hold icon (prefetch target hold icon) displayed at 51 is moved to the area 52 and displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started.

  Next, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the current symbol variation, for example, one symbol is pseudo-stopped in the left column (see FIG. 53 (B)), and this one symbol performs a predetermined deformation action to make a robot 1 symbol. (See FIGS. 53C to 53D). Then, the above-described one symbol icon change effect is performed, and the display color of the icon displayed in the region 52 is changed to, for example, green (see FIGS. 53E to 53F). When one symbol icon change effect is performed in this way, the robot 1 symbol that performed the effect leaves the liquid crystal screen 5, and, for example, reach is established (see FIG. 53G).

  When the icon changes to green in this way, for example, an SP reach effect with slightly higher reliability for the jackpot is performed (see FIG. 53 (H)), and finally a losing is reported (FIG. 53). 53 (I)).

  As described above, the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the prefetch target icon is “lost”, and the first special symbol is variably displayed in a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is slightly longer. As described above, when the reliability for “big hit” is medium, weak chances and medium chances are easily displayed, and strong chances are difficult to display.

  In this example, the pattern in which the medium chance eyes are displayed after the weak chance eyes are displayed has been described as an example. However, the medium chance eyes may be displayed continuously, and the medium chance eyes may be displayed. In some cases, it is displayed only once.

  As described above, when the reliability for the jackpot is not relatively high, even-numbered symbols (or odd-numbered symbols) that do not include 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped (or fully stopped) in a predetermined combination.

(Pattern with medium and strong chances displayed)
54 to 56 are screen views showing specific examples of chance eye effects in which a strong chance eye is displayed after a medium chance eye is displayed. FIG. 54 (A) illustrates a state in which the first special symbol and the decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in a state where the number of reserved first special symbol determination is “3”. In such a situation, for example, the above-described pre-determination process is executed at the time of winning the start opening for the first special symbol determination corresponding to the third hold icon in the hold area 51, and based on the pre-determination result When it is determined that the chance eye effect is displayed after the medium chance eye is displayed, the following effect is performed.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 54A, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, the decorative symbol is displayed in the holding area 51. The earliest hold icon moves to the area 52 and is displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started (see FIG. 54B). Accordingly, the prefetch target hold icon, which is the target of the above-described pre-determination process, moves from the position indicating the third hold to the position indicating the second hold (FIG. 54 ( A) and (B)).

  As described above, when the display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the left-side decorative symbol, the right-side decorative symbol, and the middle-row decorative symbol are simulated on the liquid crystal screen 5 in order or almost simultaneously. It stops and the three decorative symbols are in a quasi-stopped state. At this time, since it is determined in advance that the middle chance eye is displayed, for example, “915” is pseudo-stopped as illustrated in FIG.

  Next, three medium-sized green emblems are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and an effect display for emitting green light of these emblems and their surroundings is performed (see FIG. 54D). Then, three decorative symbols of the same combination as the pseudo-stop as the middle chance stop are finally stopped (see FIG. 54E), and the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the current symbol variation Is reported to be “lost”.

  When the odd number symbol of “915” indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is “lost” is actually stopped, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold area 51 moves to the area 52. Are displayed as the icon, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started (see FIG. 54F). Accordingly, the prefetch target hold icon, which is the target of the above-described pre-determination process, moves from the position indicating the second hold to the position indicating the first hold (FIG. 54 ( E) and (F)).

  As described above, when the display of the first special symbol and the decorative symbol is started, the left-side decorative symbol, the right-side decorative symbol, and the middle-row decorative symbol are simulated on the liquid crystal screen 5 in order or almost simultaneously. It stops, and the three decorative symbols are in a pseudo-stopped state (see FIG. 54G). At this time, since it is determined in advance that a strong chance is displayed, for example, “577” is pseudo-stopped as illustrated in FIG.

  As described above, when it is determined in advance that the strong chance eye is to be pseudo-stopped, the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the current symbol variation includes 7 symbols indicating that the determination result is “losing”. A losing eye composed of three odd symbols stops as a strong chance eye.

  FIG. 54 (G) illustrates an odd combination of odd symbols including two seven symbols “577”, but the number of seven symbols included in the strong chance is one. Also good. Further, a combination of odd symbols other than the seven symbols included in the strong chance may be a combination of odd symbols different from the odd symbols illustrated in FIG.

  By the way, as illustrated in FIG. 21, yellow-green 1 symbol, yellow 3 symbol, blue 5 symbol, red 7 symbol, and vermilion 9 symbol are used for strong chances. The odd-numbered symbols have different colors. In addition, since the chance eye effect is performed using the loss fluctuation with a relatively short fluctuation time of the first special symbol, the time for which the chance eye is displayed is also short. For this reason, there is a possibility that the player cannot clearly recognize that it is a strong chance by simply stopping three odd symbols including 7 symbols. The same applies to the case where three odd symbols showing strong chances are actually stopped.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, the following effect display is performed in order to easily notify the player that the strong chance eye has stopped. That is, following the strong chance display illustrated in FIG. 54 (G), three large red emblems are displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and an effect display for emitting red light of these emblems and their surroundings is performed (FIG. 54). 54 (H)). Then, three decorative symbols in the same combination as the pseudo-stop as a strong chance are stopped (see FIG. 54 (I)), and the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the current symbol variation Is reported to be “lost”.

Thus, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, since the strong chance eyes are stopped between the time when the strong chance eyes are pseudo-stopped and the actual stop is performed, the player is displayed. It is possible to easily recognize that the strong chance eyes have stopped. The effect display for the strong chance eyes is clearly different from the weak chance eyes and the medium chance eyes in the size and color of the emblem and the emission color. In this embodiment, when displaying a strong chance eye, the emblem is displayed in a red color instead of a green color, and the emblem is displayed larger than when displaying a medium chance eye, thereby increasing the visibility of the emblem. In this way, it is suggested to the player that it is a big chance. For this reason, the identification of these three chances is easy. Here, the visibility of the emblem is changed to make it easier to recognize strong chance eyes than weak chance eyes or medium chance eyes, but for the same purpose, the production sound when the strong chance eyes are displayed Is configured so that the player can recognize more easily than the effect sound when the weak chance or medium chance eyes are displayed (for example, the volume is increased or a higher sound is output).
May be adopted.

  When the odd number symbol of “577” indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is “losing” is actually stopped, as shown in FIG. 54 (I) and FIG. The earliest hold icon (prefetch target hold icon) displayed at 51 is moved to the area 52 and displayed as the icon, and the first special symbol and the decorative symbol change display are started.

  When the variation display of these symbols is started, for example, 2 symbols in the left column, 6 symbols in the right column, and 1 symbol in the middle column are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 55B). Then, one symbol that is quasi-stopped in the middle row performs a predetermined deformation action to transform into one vehicle symbol (see FIG. 55 (D)), and this vehicle one symbol attacks the six symbols in the right column. Is performed (see FIG. 55E). Here, when the car 1 symbol succeeds in sliding down the six symbols in the right row downward, the decorative symbols in the middle row and the right row are restarted to start high-speed scrolling (see FIG. 55 (F)).

  When high-speed scrolling of the middle symbol and the right symbol is started, for example, immediately after that, 7 symbols suddenly stop in the middle row (see FIG. 55 (G)). Thus, when 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row, the pseudo-continuous notice effect develops at least until the third series. For this reason, the three decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 55 (B)), and after that, a deformation action (not shown) is performed in which the 7 symbols are transformed into the Robo 7 symbols, which develops into a pseudo 2nd symbol variation. (See FIG. 55H).

  In the second pseudo variation, for example, 5 symbols in the left column may stop in a pseudo manner (see FIG. 55I), and the 5 symbols may perform a deformation action (see FIG. 56A). When the 5 symbols are successfully transformed into the robot 5 symbols, for example, a 5 symbol suggestion effect for stopping the 7 symbols performing the 7 symbol pseudo-ream is performed. Specifically, an effect display in which the robot 5 symbol attacks the left column by punching is performed, and for example, three symbols suddenly stop in the left column where the decorative symbol is scrolled at high speed (see FIG. 56C). Next, an effect display that the ROBO 5 symbols attack the right row by punching is performed, and for example, 4 symbols suddenly stop in the right row where the decorative symbols are scrolled at high speed (see FIG. 56D). Then, the effect display in which the robot 5 symbol attacks the middle row by punching is performed, and for example, the seven symbols suddenly stop in the middle row where the decorative symbol is scrolled at high speed (see FIG. 56E). As a result, the development to the pseudo third series is confirmed, and the 7 symbols are transformed into the robot 7 symbols, and an effect suggesting the development to the pseudo third series is performed (see FIG. 56F). The pattern develops into eye variation (see FIG. 56G).

  In this way, after developing the pseudo third series, for example, the SPSP reach effect is developed (see FIG. 56 (H)), and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode in which “big hit” is finally notified. (See FIG. 56 (I)).

  As described above, the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the prefetch target icon is “big hit”, and the first special symbol is variably displayed in a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long. As described above, when the reliability for “big hit” is relatively high, it is difficult to display weak chances and medium chances, and conversely, strong chances are easily displayed.

  In this example, the pattern in which the strong chance eyes are displayed after the medium chance eyes are displayed has been described as an example. However, there are cases where the strong chance eyes are displayed continuously, and the strong chance eyes are displayed. In some cases, it is displayed only once.

  Thus, when the reliability with respect to the jackpot is relatively high, odd symbols including 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped (or fully stopped) in a predetermined combination.

  In addition, the following can be said for each chance displayed by the chance eye effect. In other words, the weak chance is a chance that suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively low. For this reason, there is a feature that it is difficult to display weak chances when a prior determination result is obtained that a “big hit” is determined at the time of digestion of a hold subject to prior determination processing. In addition, the determination result of the first special symbol determination executed at the time of digestion of the hold is “lost”, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected as a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively short. When the prior determination result is obtained, a weak chance is easily displayed.

  The medium chance is an opportunity that suggests that the reliability for the jackpot is medium. For this reason, the medium chance may be selected when a prior determination result is obtained that it will be determined as “big hit” at the time of digestion of the hold that has been subject to the prior determination process. In addition, the determination result of the first special symbol determination executed at the time of digestion of the hold is “lost”, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected as the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is medium. If the prior determination result is obtained, the medium chance is easily displayed.

  The strong chance is a chance that suggests that the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high. For this reason, when a prior determination result is obtained that a “big hit” is determined at the time of digestion of a hold subject to the prior determination process, a strong chance is easily displayed. In addition, the determination result of the first special symbol determination executed at the time of the digestion of the hold is “lost”, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected as a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long. Even when a prior determination result is obtained, a strong chance is easily displayed.

Up to this point, the chance eye effect performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment has been described, but the following configuration may be adopted for the chance eye effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, for example, with respect to the strong chance eyes illustrated in FIG. 54, the display of three odd symbols (including seven symbols) to be pseudo-stopped, and the three large red emblems and their surroundings are made to emit red light. Although the case where the effect display (effect image display in FIG. 54H) is performed separately in time series (in series) has been described, in other embodiments, the pseudo stop display of three odd symbols and the above-described display You may make it perform an effect image display simultaneously. In this case, for example, when the strong chance of “577” is stopped as illustrated in FIG. 55 (G), the 7 symbols in the middle row and the right row are red decorative symbols, and the 5 symbols in the left row are this. It is conceivable to adopt a configuration in which the two seven symbols are made to emit red light and at the same time the five symbols in the left column are not made to emit light (for example, they are turned off). It is conceivable that such a configuration is similarly adopted for weak chances and medium chances. For example, in the case of displaying the “266” weak chance example illustrated in FIG. 50C, a configuration in which the two symbols are turned off and the six symbols in the middle row and the right row are caused to emit blue light is considered.

  In this embodiment, a configuration in which a combination of three decorative symbols including at least one seven symbols represents a strong chance is adopted. However, in other embodiments, for example, seven symbols are displayed in the middle row and the right row. A combination of three decorative symbols that are pseudo-stopped and the even-numbered symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column may be a strong chance. In this case, as a strong chance display, it is conceivable that the even numbered symbols in the left column are turned off and the seven symbols in the middle and right columns are made to emit red light.

  Further, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a combination of three odd symbols not including 7 symbols represents a medium chance, but in other embodiments, for example, one symbol is pseudo-stopped in the middle row and the right row. In addition, a combination of three decorative symbols in which other odd symbols (or even symbols) are pseudo-stopped in the left column may be used as the middle chance. In this case, as a display of the middle chance, it is conceivable to turn off the odd numbered symbols (or even numbered symbols) in the left column and emit one green symbol (or yellow green) in the middle column and the right column.

  In this embodiment, a configuration in which a combination of three even symbols represents a weak chance is adopted. However, in other embodiments, for example, two symbols are pseudo-stopped in the left column and the middle column, and in the right column. A combination of three decorative symbols in which other even-numbered symbols (or odd-numbered symbols) pseudo-stop may be used as weak chances. In this case, as a weak chance display, it is conceivable to turn off the even-numbered symbols (or odd-numbered symbols) in the right column and cause the left and middle columns to emit blue light.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, when a configuration is adopted in which 7 symbols are the strongest, then the other odd symbols are strong, and the even symbols are weak, two 7 symbols and other decorative symbols (even odd numbers) 3 decorative symbols combined with (even number) may be displayed as a strong chance, and 3 decorative symbols combining 2 symbols, for example, 1 symbol and other decorative symbols (may be odd or even if not 7) It may be displayed as a medium chance, and for example, three decorative symbols combining two symbols, for example, two symbols and other decorative symbols (which may be odd or even if not 7) may be displayed as weak chances.

  Up to this point, specific examples of effects using the symbols illustrated in FIG. 21 have been described. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, odd symbols are displayed in both the first display mode and the second display mode. On the other hand, a configuration is adopted in which even-numbered symbols can only change to one of these two display modes (the first display mode in this embodiment). Thus, since there is a difference regarding the change of the display mode between the odd symbol and the even symbol, the effect using the decorative symbol can be effectively performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the robot 1 symbol, the robot 3 symbol, the robot 5 symbol, and the robot 7 symbol in which the odd symbol is deformed each indicate the execution of the corresponding effect alone or perform the effect itself. On the other hand, the robot design in which the even-numbered design is deformed adopts a configuration that does not suggest a corresponding effect or execute the effect by itself. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the odd number of all the decorative symbols will be pseudo-stopped.

  Further, for example, if attention is paid to 1 symbol, the robot 1 symbol alone suggests or executes a specific effect such as a 1 symbol icon change effect, and in addition to the 2 symbol, another design such as a push icon change effect. It has a function to suggest and execute the production. For this reason, the player cannot completely specify which effect is suggested or performed when, for example, one symbol is pseudo-stopped. For this reason, what effect is suggested or performed You can enjoy the game while guessing what will happen.

  Further, for example, if attention is paid to 7 symbols, if pseudo stop is performed in the middle row, it will develop into a pseudo-continuous pseudo-announcement effect (see FIGS. 35 and 36). If pseudo stop is performed in the right row, 7 symbol suggestion effect ( As shown in FIG. 37), there is a feature that the development direction of the subsequent production differs depending on the stop position even with the same decorative design. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game while estimating the development direction of the subsequent effects based on which column each symbol stops.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if each decorative symbol does not change to the first display mode or the second display mode that can lead to the development of a production suggesting the reliability for the jackpot, The chance eye may stop in the state of the display mode. For this reason, even if the display mode of each decorative symbol does not change to the first display mode or the second display mode, the player does not lose the sense of expectation that an effect suggesting the degree of reliability for the jackpot is generated. It is possible to enjoy the game.

  Hereinafter, an example of the internal configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the processing performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 for realizing the above-described effects based on FIGS. 8 to 56 will be described in detail.

[Configuration of control device of pachinko gaming machine 1]
On the back side of the game board 2, a control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided in addition to a ball tank for storing game balls sent to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29. As illustrated in FIG. 57, the control device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 controls the game control board 100 that controls the progress of the game, such as various determinations and command transmission, and the effects based on the commands received from the game control board 100. An effect control board 130 for controlling the image, an image sound control board 140 for controlling the effects by images and sounds, a lamp control board 150 for controlling effects by various lamps and movable bodies, and the like. Note that the configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the effect control board 130, the image sound control board 140, and the lamp control board 150 may be configured as one board.

[Configuration Example of Game Control Board 100]
The game control board 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, and a main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 performs various arithmetic processes related to determination and the number of payout balls based on a program stored in the main ROM 102. The main RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 101 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The game control board 100 includes a first start port switch 111, a second start port switch 112, an electric tulip control unit 113, a gate switch 114, a first large winning port switch 115, a second large winning port switch 116, and a V winning port. The switch 117, the discharge switch 118, the first grand prize port control unit 119, the second big prize port control unit 120, the V prize port control unit 121, the normal prize port switch 122, and the respective indicators 41 to 41 constituting the display 4. 48 is connected.

  The first start port switch 111 detects that a game ball has won the first start port 11 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The second start port switch 112 detects that a game ball has won the second start port 12 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. In response to a control signal from the game control board 100, the electric tulip control unit 113 opens and closes the second start port 12 by activating an electric solenoid coupled to the pair of blade members of the electric tulip 17 so as to be able to transmit driving. To do. The gate switch 114 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate 16 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100.

  The first grand prize opening switch 115 detects that a game ball has won the first big prize opening 13 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The second grand prize opening switch 116 detects that a game ball has won the second big prize opening 19 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100. The V winning opening switch 117 detects a game ball entering the V area 195 and outputs the detection signal to the game control board 100. The discharge switch 118 detects a game ball that enters the lost area 196 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100.

  Based on the control signal from the game control board 100, the first grand prize winning port control unit 119 operates the electric solenoid coupled to the plate that closes the first big prize winning port 13 so as to be able to transmit the driving force. Open / close the grand prize winning opening 13. Based on the control signal from the game control board 100, the second big prize opening control unit 120 is an electric motor connected to the first blade member 191 (see FIG. 4) that closes the second big prize opening 19 so as to be able to transmit the drive. By operating the solenoid, the second grand prize winning port 19 is opened and closed. Based on the control signal from the game control board 100, the V winning opening control unit 121 operates the electric solenoid connected to the second blade member 192 (see FIG. 4) that opens and closes the V area 195, thereby 195 is opened and closed. The normal winning port switch 122 detects that the game ball has won the normal winning port 14 and outputs a detection signal to the game control board 100.

  The main CPU 101 of the game control board 100 receives a detection signal from the first start port switch 111, the second start port switch 112, the first big prize port switch 115, the second big prize port switch 116, or the normal prize port switch 122. When input, the payout control board (not shown) is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game ball has won, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is determined based on information from the payout control board. to manage. Although a detailed description is omitted, the payout control board supplies the game ball to the upper plate 28 or the lower plate 29 by controlling a drive motor that sends out the game ball from the ball tank. In addition, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment has the four normal winning opening 14, it has four normal winning opening switches 122. However, in FIG. Only the notation.

  The main CPU 101 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Also, various random numbers are acquired as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is input, and the second special symbol determination is executed using the acquired random numbers. If it is determined that the game is a big hit, the first big prize opening 13 and the second big prize opening 19 are opened and closed via the first big prize opening control section 119 and the second big prize opening control section 120 to win big hits. Run a game. In addition, the V area 195 is opened and closed via the V prize opening control unit 121 in accordance with the round game related to the second big prize opening 19. When the detection signal from the V winning opening switch 117 is input, the gaming state after the jackpot game is set to the probability changing gaming state, and when the detection signal from the V winning opening switch 117 is not input. Sets the gaming state after the big hit game to the short-time gaming state.

  Further, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number at the timing when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input, and executes normal symbol determination using the acquired random number. And when it determines with opening the 2nd starting port 12, the 2nd starting port 12 is temporarily open | released by operating the electric solenoid connected with the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip control part 113. FIG.

  Further, the main CPU 101 causes the respective display devices 41 to 48 constituting the display device 4 to execute the processing described above with reference to FIG.

[Configuration Example of Production Control Board 130]
The effect control board 130 includes a sub CPU 131, a sub ROM 132, a sub RAM 133, and an RTC (real time clock) 134. The sub CPU 131 performs a calculation process when controlling the presentation based on the program stored in the sub ROM 132. The sub RAM 133 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 131 executes the program, or a work area for data processing. The RTC 134 measures the current date and time (date and time).

  The sub CPU 131 sets the production contents based on game information related to special symbol determination, normal symbol determination, jackpot game, and the like transmitted from the game control board 100. In that case, the input of the operation information from the production | presentation button 26 or the production | presentation key 27 may be received, and the production | generation content according to the operation information may be set. The sub CPU 131 transmits a command instructing execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

[Configuration Example of Lamp Control Board 150]
The lamp control board 150 includes a lamp CPU 151, a lamp ROM 152, and a lamp RAM 153. Based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 152, the lamp CPU 151 is built in the stage effects 71 to 73, the board lamp 25 provided in the game board 2, the frame lamp 37 built in the frame member 3, and the production button 26. The button lamp 262, the button motor 261 that changes the state of the effect button 26, and the like are controlled. The lamp RAM 153 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the lamp CPU 151 executes the program, or a work area such as data processing.

  The lamp ROM 152 stores light emission pattern data and operation pattern data. Here, the light emission pattern data includes light emission patterns such as light emitting elements such as LEDs built in the production actors 71 to 73, a panel lamp 25, a frame lamp 37, a button lamp 262 built in the production button 26, and the like. It is the data shown. The operation pattern data is data indicating the operation pattern of the effect actors 71 to 73 and data indicating the operation pattern of the effect button 26.

  The lamp CPU 151 reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153, and the light emitting elements and panel lamps of the effect objects 71 to 73. 25, the light emission of each light emitting element such as the frame lamp 37, the button lamp 262 of the effect button 26, and the like is controlled.

  In addition, the lamp CPU 151 reads out the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the effect control board 130 from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 152 to the lamp RAM 153, and performs the stepping for operating the effect agents 71 to 73. The motor drive and the drive of a button motor 261 (for example, a stepping motor) that moves the effect button 26 up and down are controlled.

[Configuration Example of Image Sound Control Board 140]
FIG. 58 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the image sound control board 140. The image sound control board 140 performs image display control of the liquid crystal display device 5 and effect sound output control of the speaker 24. As illustrated in FIG. 58, the image sound control board 140 includes an overall CPU 141, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 142, an acoustic DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 143, a control ROM 144, a control RAM 145, an acoustic ROM 146, and an SDRAM 147. , CGROM 148, and VRAM 149.

  The overall CPU 141 stores image data stored in the CGROM 148 with respect to the VDP 142 based on programs stored in the control ROM 144, various tables such as a display list creation table, commands received from the effect control board 130, and the like. An instruction to display on the liquid crystal display device 5 is given. This instruction is mainly performed by outputting a display list.

  Here, the display list is composed of commands for instructing execution of drawing in frame units. The type of image to be drawn, the position (coordinates) to draw the image, display priority, display magnification, and rotation. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The display list creation table is a table used for creating this display list.

  The overall CPU 141 instructs the sound DSP 143 to output the sound data stored in the sound ROM 146 from the speaker 24.

  The control ROM 144 is configured by a mask ROM, and stores a control program for the overall CPU 141, a display list generation program for generating a display list, various tables, and the like.

  The control RAM 145 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the general CPU 141 executes the program, or a work area for data processing.

  The CGROM 148 stores effect data necessary for executing a change effect accompanying a change display of a special symbol, an effect accompanying a jackpot game, and the like. The CGROM 148 includes a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and includes sprite data (one piece of image data) including a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 × 32 pixels), a plurality of pieces of image data Compressed and stored movie data consisting of a collection of The pixel information is composed of color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 148 stores, without compressing, palette data or the like in which color number information for specifying a color number and display color information for actually displaying colors are associated with each other.

  Note that only a part of the image data stored in the CGROM 148 may be compressed. As a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

  The VRAM 149 is configured by an SRAM that can write and read image data at high speed, and includes a display list storage area 1491, a development storage area 1492, a frame buffer 1493, and the like.

  The display list storage area 1491 temporarily stores the display list output from the overall CPU 141. The expanded storage area 1492 stores image data that has been read from the CGROM 148 and expanded. The frame buffer 1493 is a frame buffer that is also used for drawing and displaying image data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5.

  The VDP 142 decompresses the image data stored in a compressed state in the CGROM 148 and stores the decompressed image data in the expanded storage area 1492. Also, the VDP 142 performs a drawing process on the frame buffer 1493 using the image data stored in the development storage area 1492 based on the display list stored in the display list storage area 1491. In addition, the VDP 142 generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the frame buffer 1493, and outputs the generated RGB signal to the liquid crystal display device 5.

  Connected to the acoustic DSP 143 are an acoustic ROM 146 for storing various acoustic data relating to music, voice, sound effects, etc., an SDRAM 147 used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 143, and an amplifier 1431. The acoustic DSP 143 reads the acoustic data corresponding to the instruction from the overall CPU 141 from the acoustic ROM 146 to the SDRAM 147, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after the data processing to the speaker 24 (via the amplifier 1431). The amplifier 1431 adjusts the volume according to an instruction regarding the volume obtained from the overall CPU 141 via the acoustic DSP 143 and causes the speaker 24 to output acoustic data.

  In this embodiment, the case where the VDP is responsible for drawing management and the acoustic DSP is responsible for sound management will be described. However, in other embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the VDP is responsible for both drawing management and sound management. May be. In this case, there is no need to separately provide an acoustic DSP.

[Configuration Example of Main RAM 103]
FIG. 59 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of the main RAM 103 and various types of information stored in the main RAM 103. As illustrated in FIG. 59A, the main RAM 103 includes a determination storage area 1030, a first reserved storage area 1031, a second reserved storage area 1032, a third reserved storage area 1033, and a fourth reserved storage area 1034. A first reserved storage area 1035, a second reserved storage area 1036, a third reserved storage area 1037, and a fourth reserved storage area 1038 are provided.

  The determination storage area 1030 is a storage area for storing various information used for the special symbol determination when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 are storage areas for storing various information related to the first special symbol determination, and the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 are the second storage areas. This is a storage area for storing various information related to special symbol determination. In addition, the second special symbol determination is prioritized over the first special symbol determination. For this reason, in the determination storage area 1030, when the special symbol determination is performed, when the second special symbol determination is suspended, various information stored in the first reserved storage area 1035 is shifted, and the first When only the special symbol determination is suspended, various information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted.

  As illustrated in FIG. 59B, the reserved storage areas 1031 to 1038 are areas acquired by the main CPU 101 for storing jackpot random numbers, areas for storing design random numbers, areas for storing reach random numbers, It includes an area for storing variation pattern random numbers, an area for storing prior determination information, and the like.

  The jackpot random number is a random number for determining jackpot or loss. The design random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach when it is determined that the reach is lost. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is variably displayed.

  The pre-determination information is information obtained by a pre-determination process (see FIG. 64) described later based on the jackpot random number, the design random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. Specifically, the pre-determination information is information indicating whether or not the winning start information, the determination result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot if it is a jackpot, It includes information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol, information indicating the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like. Here, the winning start opening information is acquired when the game ball wins the first starting opening 11 with the jackpot random number, the design random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number stored in the same reserved storage area. Information indicating whether or not the game ball has been acquired by winning the second start port 12. The pre-determination information including these pieces of information is stored in the same storage area as the jackpot random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number used in the pre-determination process.

  The five pieces of information described based on FIG. 59 (B) are stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034 in order from the first reserved storage area 1031 every time a game ball wins the first start port 11. Every time a game ball wins in the second start port 12, it is stored in any of the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 in order from the first reserved storage area 1035.

  For example, when five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where no information is stored in any of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034, the five pieces of information are: It is stored in the first reserved storage area 1031. For example, when five pieces of information related to the first special symbol determination are newly acquired in a state where five pieces of information are stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 and the second reserved storage area 1032, the five pieces of information Is stored in the third reserved storage area 1033.

  Further, when the information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 when the first special symbol determination is performed, the information is stored in the reserved storage areas after the second reserved storage area 1032. Information is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031 side. For example, when information stored in the first reserved storage area 1031 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 in a state where information is stored in each of the first reserved storage area 1031 to the third reserved storage area 1033, the second Information stored in the reserved storage area 1032 is shifted to the first reserved storage area 1031, and information stored in the third reserved storage area 1033 is shifted to the second reserved storage area 1032.

  Such information shift processing is similarly performed in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 in which information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are held, that is, information is stored in both the first reserved storage area 1031 and the first reserved storage area 1035. Is stored, the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1035 to the fourth reserved storage area 1038 is preferentially performed prior to the shift processing in the first reserved storage area 1031 to the fourth reserved storage area 1034.

  By the way, even when a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or when a game ball is won at the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 during a jackpot game and various random numbers are acquired, a special symbol determination or a special symbol is displayed. The variable display cannot be made immediately.

  For this reason, when various random numbers are acquired under such circumstances, the main CPU 101 uses the acquired various random numbers and the like as the hold storage areas 1031 to 1038 as information for holding the special symbol determination as described above. Is going to be stored in. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not variably displayed, the special symbol determination is not suspended, and the game is not in the big hit game, the main CPU 101 obtains various random numbers obtained with the start opening prize as a trigger. The data is directly stored in the determination storage area 1030.

[Timer interrupt processing by game control board 100]
Next, timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the game control board 100. The game control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 60 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. . Note that the processing of the game control board 100 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 60 and subsequent figures is performed in accordance with a command issued by the main CPU 101 based on a program stored in the main ROM 102.

  First, the main CPU 101 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a design random number, a reach random number, a variation pattern random number, and a normal design random number (step S1).

  The normal symbol random number is a random number for determining whether or not to open the second start port 12. The jackpot random number, the design random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, and the ordinary design random number are incremented by “1” every time the process of step S1 is performed. Note that a loop counter is used as a counter for performing the processing of step S1, and each random number is returned to “0” and updated after reaching a preset maximum value.

  Subsequent to the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 executes a switch process when a detection signal is input from each switch (step S2). This switch processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S2, the main CPU 101 executes special symbol determination, displays the special symbol on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and displays the determination result of the special symbol determination. A special symbol process including a process of stopping and displaying the special symbol shown is executed (step S3). This special symbol process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S3, the main CPU 101 includes a process of executing normal symbol determination, causing the normal symbol display unit 45 to display the normal symbol in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying the normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4).

  Following the process of step S4, the main CPU 101 performs the electric tulip process for operating the electric tulip 17 via the electric tulip control unit 113 when it is determined that the second start port 12 is opened as a result of the normal symbol determination. Is executed (step S5).

  Subsequent to the process of step S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is a big hit in the process of step S3, the first big prize port control unit 119, the second big prize port control unit 120, and the V prize port control unit A special winning opening release control process for opening the first big winning opening 13, the second large winning opening 19, and the V area 195 by controlling 121 is executed (step S6).

  Subsequent to the process of step S6, the main CPU 101 executes a prize ball process for controlling the payout of the prize ball according to the winning of the game ball (step S7).

  Subsequent to step S7, the main CPU 101 transmits to the effect control board 130 information necessary for determining various commands and effect contents set (stored) in the main RAM 103 in the process step before step S7. Processing is executed (step S8).

[Switch processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 61 is a detailed flowchart of the switch process in step S2 of FIG. Subsequent to the process of step S1, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the first start port switch 111, as illustrated in FIG. 61, and is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. For the random number (big hit random number, symbol random number, reach random number, and variation pattern random number), the first start port switch process including the process of acquiring the value at the time when the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 is input is executed. (Step S21). The first start port switch process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 101 monitors the presence or absence of a detection signal input from the second start port switch 112, and the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 is received for various random numbers that are appropriately updated by the process of step S1. A second start port switch process including a process of acquiring a value at the time of input is executed (step S22). The second start port switch process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Then, the main CPU 101 monitors whether or not a detection signal is input from the gate switch 114, and the value at the time when the detection signal from the gate switch 114 is input with respect to the normal symbol random number that is appropriately updated by the process of step S1. The gate switch process for acquiring the above is executed (step S23).

[First Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 62 is a detailed flowchart of the first start port switch process in step S21 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 62, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the first start port switch 111 (specifically, the first start port switch 111 is turned “ON” following the random number update process in step S <b> 1. On the basis of whether or not an ON signal indicating that the first start port switch 111 has been turned ON is determined (step S210). Here, when it is determined that the first start port switch 111 is “ON” (step S <b> 210: YES), the hold number U <b> 1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether it is less than the maximum reserved number Umax1 (“4” in the present embodiment) of the first special symbol determination (step S211).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1 (step S211: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U1 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S212), and the first special symbol. As the acquisition information used for the determination, a jackpot random number, a design random number, a reach random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated with each other and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S213 to S216).

  As described above, various acquisition information such as a big hit random number is acquired in accordance with the establishment of the acquisition condition that the first start port switch 111 is “ON” in a state where the hold number U1 is less than the maximum hold number Umax1.

  Following the processing of step S216, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S217). The main RAM 103 stores a time-saving game flag. At this time, the short game flag is set to “OFF” when the electric tulip 17 is controlled in a state where it is difficult to win the game ball at the second start port 12, and conversely, the game ball is likely to win the second start port 12. This flag is set to “ON” when the electric tulip 17 is controlled to the state. In step S217, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state based on whether or not the short-time game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON”.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not the high base state (step S217: NO), that is, when the time-saving game flag is set to “OFF”, the main CPU 101 executes a pre-determination process (step S218). Specifically, prior to the jackpot determination process (see FIG. 66) and the variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 67), which will be described later, the jackpot is based on the information stored in the main RAM 103 by the processes of steps S213 to S216. Whether or not to pre-determine whether or not the first special symbol determination is executed and the variation pattern of the special symbol that is actually selected is acquired. This prior determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S218 or determines that the high base state is set (the time-short game flag is set to “ON”) (step S217: YES), the main CPU 101 determines the first special symbol determination. Such a hold command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S219). This hold command is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination has been put on hold, and includes pre-determination information obtained by the process of step S218, and the effect control board 130 is obtained by the transmission process of step S8. Sent to.

[Second Start Port Switch Processing by Game Control Board 100]
FIG. 63 is a detailed flowchart of the second start port switch process in step S22 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 63, the main CPU 101 detects the detection signal from the second start port switch 112 (specifically, the second start port switch 112 is “ON” following the first start port switch process of step S21. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 112 has been turned “ON” based on whether or not an “ON signal indicating that it has turned“ ”has been input (step S220).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the second start port switch 112 has been turned “ON” (step S220: YES), the second special symbol determination hold number U2 stored in the main RAM 103 is stored in the main ROM 102. It is determined whether it is less than the maximum reserved number Umax2 (in this embodiment, “4”) of the second special symbol determination (step S221).

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the hold number U2 is less than the maximum hold number Umax2 (step S221: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the value of the hold number U2 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S222), and the second special symbol. As the acquisition information used for the determination, a jackpot random number, a design random number, a reach random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number are acquired, and these random numbers are associated with each other and stored in the main RAM 103 (steps S223 to S226).

  Following the process of step S226, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state, similarly to the process of step S217 (step S227). Here, when it is determined that the current state is the high base state (step S227: YES), that is, when the time-saving game flag is set to “ON”, a pre-determination process is executed (step S228). This prior determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S228 or determines that it is not in the high base state (the time-short game flag is set to “OFF”) (step S227: NO), the main CPU 101 determines the second special symbol determination. Such a hold command is set in the main RAM 103 (step S229). This hold command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination is put on hold, and includes pre-determination information obtained by the process of step S228, and the effect control board 130 is obtained by the transmission process of step S8. Sent to.

[Preliminary determination processing by game control board 100]
Hereinafter, the prior determination process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 64 is a detailed flowchart of the prior determination processing in steps S218 and S228 of FIGS.

  If the main CPU 101 determines in step S217 in FIG. 62 that the high base state is not set, or if it is determined in step S227 in FIG. 63 that the high base state is set, the main CPU 101 executes jackpot determination processing (step S2181). ). Specifically, in the low probability state (in the present embodiment, the normal gaming state or the short-time gaming state), the low probability big hit random number table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103. On the other hand, in the case of a high probability state (probability game state in this embodiment), the high probability big hit random number table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103. Then, whether or not the jackpot random number acquired in step S213 of FIG. 62 (or step S223 of FIG. 63) matches any of the winning values stored in the jackpot random number table set in the main RAM 103. Based on this, it is determined whether or not a big hit is to be determined at the start of the change.

  Next, based on the determination result of step S2181, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined to be a big hit at the start of the change (step S2182). Here, when it is determined that it is a big hit at the start of the change (step S2182: YES), the big change pattern table for the big hit is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S2183).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit at the start of the change (step S2182: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether a reach effect is performed during the change (step S2184). Specifically, based on whether or not the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process in step S2181 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102, It is determined whether or not a reach effect is performed during the fluctuation.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the reach effect is to be performed (step S2184: YES), the main CPU 101 reads the reach variation pattern table from the main ROM 102 and sets it in the main RAM 103 (step S2185).

  By the way, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing” and the reach effect is not performed during the change, the first special symbol is determined based on the number of suspensions of the first special symbol determination at the start of the change. Variation pattern is determined. The number of first special symbol determinations may be different before and after the first special symbol determination being held is digested. For this reason, the variation pattern of the special symbol acquired before the first special symbol determination is digested may be different from the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when the first special symbol determination is actually digested. is there. That is, for the right of the first special symbol determination in which the reach effect is not performed during the change, an accurate special symbol variation pattern may not be acquired prior to the first special symbol determination.

  For this reason, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S2184: NO), the process proceeds to step S2187 without performing the variation pattern random number determination process of step S2186 described later.

  When the main CPU 101 sets the big hit variation pattern table or the reach variation pattern table, the main CPU 101 executes variation pattern random number determination processing (step S2186). Specifically, the variation pattern random number acquired at the time of starting winning a prize together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2181 is the random number value defined in the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103. Based on which random number value matches, the variation pattern of the first special symbol to be selected in the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation is specified.

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S2186 or determines that the reach effect is not performed (step S2184: NO), the main CPU 101 generates pre-determination information and stores it in the main RAM 103 (step S2187). The area in which the prior determination information is stored is as described above with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the main CPU 101 determines the jackpot based on the acquired information based on the acquired information such as the jackpot random number acquired when the game ball has won the first starting port 11 (or the second starting port 12). Prior to performing the determination and the variation pattern selection process, the variation pattern (that is, the variation time) of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is acquired.

[Special symbol processing by game control board 100]
Next, the details of the special symbol process executed by the game control board 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol process in step S3 of FIG.

  As illustrated in FIG. 65, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress based on whether or not the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 103 is set to “ON” ( Step S301). This jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to “ON” at the start of the jackpot game, and is set to “OFF” at the end of the jackpot game. Here, when it is determined that the game is a big hit game (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the jackpot game is not being played (step S301: NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). If it is determined that the special symbol variation display is not being performed (step S302: NO), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol determination hold number U2 stored in the main RAM 103 is equal to or greater than “1”. (Step S303). Here, when it is determined that the holding number U2 is “1” or more (step S303: YES), the holding number U2 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S304).

  If the main CPU 101 determines that the holding number U2 is not “1” or more (step S303: NO), whether or not the holding number U1 of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 103 is “1” or more. Is determined (step S305). If it is determined that the hold number U1 is “1” or more (step S305: YES), the main CPU 101 updates the hold number U1 to a value obtained by subtracting “1” (step S306).

  Following the process of step S304 or the process of step S306, the main CPU 101 executes a shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 103 (step S308). Specifically, when the main CPU 101 executes a shift process following the process of step S304, the main CPU 101 determines the earliest acquired information stored in the reserved storage areas 1035 to 1038 for the second special symbol determination. The remaining storage information is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 side while being shifted to the storage area 1030. Further, when the shift process is executed following the process of step S306, the earliest acquired information stored in the first special symbol determination reserved storage areas 1031 to 1034 is shifted to the determination storage area 1030. At the same time, the remaining acquired information is shifted to the determination storage area 1030 side.

  Subsequent to the process of step S308, the main CPU 101 executes a jackpot determination process based on the random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S309). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot, and if it is determined that it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined. Then, special symbol setting information indicating the results of these processes is set in the main RAM 103. The jackpot determination process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  As is clear from the notation of FIG. 65, when the starting condition such that the main CPU 101 is not in the jackpot game and is not changing the symbol is satisfied, in this step S309, based on the jackpot random number acquired at the start opening winning, It is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player.

  Subsequent to the process of step S309, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern selection process for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol (step S310). This variation pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 101 determines whether the special symbol setting information set in the process of step S309, the special symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination. A change start command is set in the main RAM 103 including information indicating whether it is related, setting information of the change pattern set in the process of step S310, information regarding the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like (step S311).

  This variation start command is a command for instructing the start of an effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. As a result, the decorative display variation display or the like on the liquid crystal display device 5 is started.

  Subsequent to the process of step S311, the main CPU 101 starts the special symbol variation display based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command set in step S311 (step S312). At that time, in the case where the acquisition information (random number) related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area 1030, when the processing of step S309 to step S311 is performed, in the first special symbol display 41 Start to display special symbols. On the other hand, when the processing of step S309 to step S311 is performed in a state where the acquired information (random number) related to the second special symbol determination is stored, the special symbol variable display is started on the second special symbol display 42. To do.

  Next, the main CPU 101 starts measuring a variation time that is an elapsed time from the start of the variation display in step S312 (step S313).

  When the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S313 or determines that the special symbol is changing (step S302: YES), the main CPU 101 is selected by the process of step S310 from the start of the measurement of the changing time in step S313. It is determined whether or not the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step S315). Here, when it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (step S315: NO), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

  When the main CPU 101 determines that the variation time has elapsed (step S315: YES), the special symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. Is set in the main RAM 103 (step S316). This symbol confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130 by the transmission process in step S8. Thereby, the process etc. which stop-display the decoration symbol which was variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 5 in the aspect which shows the determination result of special symbol determination, etc. are performed.

  Subsequent to the process in step S316, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol variation display started in the process in step S312 (step S317). Specifically, the special symbol set in the process of step S309 (a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display that has variably displayed the special symbol. The special symbol stop display is continued at least until a predetermined symbol determination time (for example, 1 second) elapses.

  Thus, the main CPU 101 displays the special symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process after the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 as the first special symbol display 41. Alternatively, the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S317, the main CPU 101 resets the variation time when the measurement is started in the process of step S313 (step S318), and performs a process during stop including a process of starting the jackpot game when the jackpot is won. It executes (step S319).

[Big hit judgment processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 66 is a detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S309 of FIG. The main CPU 101 executes jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 (step S3091). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 is a jackpot based on whether or not it matches a preset winning value.

  The winning value here is a jackpot winning value defined in the high probability jackpot random number table or the low probability jackpot random number table. When the jackpot determination is executed in the high probability state (the probability variation gaming state in the present embodiment), the winning value stored in the high probability time jackpot random number table is used. On the other hand, when the jackpot determination is executed in the low probability state (the normal gaming state or the short time gaming state in the present embodiment), the winning value stored in the low probability time jackpot random number table is used.

  In this way, the main CPU 101 starts such that acquisition information such as a jackpot random number acquired in response to the winning of a game ball in the first start port 11 or the second start port 12 is stored in the determination storage area 1030. When the condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to the player based on the jackpot random number.

  Following the processing of step S3091, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot (step S3092). Here, when it is determined that the game is a jackpot (step S3092: YES), the type of jackpot is determined with reference to the symbol determination table for the jackpot stored in the main ROM 102 (step S3093).

  Specifically, when the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination in step S3091 is related to the first special symbol determination, the symbol random number is The jackpot type is determined based on which random number value specified in the symbol determination table for the first start opening winning match. On the other hand, if it is related to the second special symbol determination, the type of jackpot is determined based on which random number value specified in the symbol determination table for the second start opening winning matches the symbol random number To decide.

  In this way, the main CPU 101 determines the type of jackpot so as to make a short hit per game where it is difficult to win a game ball in the V area 195 or a long hit per game where a game ball wins in the V area 195 is easy. select.

  Then, the main CPU 101 sets jackpot symbol setting information corresponding to the determined jackpot type in the main RAM 103 (step S3094). As a result, the jackpot symbol set here at the time of the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42, and the jackpot game corresponding to the special symbol is performed. It will be.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3092: NO), the main CPU 101 sets the lost symbol setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S3095). Thereby, the lost symbol set here in the process of step S317 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. In this case, the jackpot game is not performed.

[Change pattern selection processing by game control board 100]
FIG. 67 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S310 of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S309 in FIG. 65, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result in step S3091 is a jackpot (step S3101). If it is determined that the game is a big hit (step S3101: YES), the big hit variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3102).

  On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3101: NO), whether or not the reach random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 102. Based on this, it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect that makes the player expect a big hit (step S3103). If it is determined that a reach effect is to be performed (step S3103: YES), the reach variation pattern table is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3104). Conversely, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S3103: NO), the variation pattern table for loss is read from the main ROM 102 and set in the main RAM 103 (step S3105).

  Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes a variation pattern random number determination process with reference to the variation pattern table set in the main RAM 103 by the process of step S3102, the process of step S3104, or the process of step S3105 (step S3106). Specifically, when the big hit variation pattern table or the reach variation pattern table is set in the main RAM 103, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 1030 is set as the variation. A variation pattern is selected by reading from the pattern table.

  If the variation pattern table for losing is set in the main RAM 103, the number of reserved special symbol determination is specified based on the number of reserved storage areas in which various types of information are stored immediately before the shift process of step S308 is performed. Then, the variation pattern corresponding to the specified number of holdings and the presence / absence of the current time is read out from the variation pattern table for loss to select the variation pattern.

  By selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in this way, the variation time of the special symbol is inevitably determined.

  When the main CPU 101 selects the variation pattern, the main CPU 101 sets the selected variation pattern setting information in the main RAM 103 (step S3107). The variation pattern setting information is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the effect control board 130 together with the symbol setting information set in the main RAM 103 by the jackpot determination process in step S309 described above.

[Timer interrupt processing by production control board 130]
When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the sub CPU 131 of the effect control board 130 sets a CTC cycle, which is a cycle for performing timer interrupt processing to be described later. And sub CPU131 repeats the random number update process which updates the production random number etc. which are used in order to determine the content of production with the predetermined period shorter than a CTC period. That is, the sub CPU 131 repeats the timer interrupt process at the CTC cycle while repeating the random number update process at a predetermined cycle while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 68, a timer interrupt process executed in the effect control board 130 will be described. Here, FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing an example of the timer interruption process executed in the effect control board 130. The sub CPU 131 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 68 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds), similarly to the timer interrupt process performed on the game control board 100. The processing performed on the effect control board 130 described based on the flowcharts of FIG. 68 and the subsequent steps is performed according to a command issued by the sub CPU 131 based on a program stored in the sub ROM 132.

  First, when receiving a command as game information from the game control board 100, the sub CPU 131 executes a command reception process (step S10). Details of this command reception processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S10, the sub CPU 131 executes a command transmission process (step S30). Specifically, the command set in the sub-RAM 133 by the process of step S10 is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 (and the lamp control board 150). By performing this command transmission process, execution of effects by image display, audio output, etc. is instructed to the image sound control board 140, and execution of effects by turning on various lamps, etc. Is done.

  Then, the sub CPU 131 executes data transfer processing (step S50). Specifically, since the data regarding the image sound control is transmitted from the image sound control unit 140, the data is transferred to the lamp control unit 150. As a result, the lamp control unit 150 produces effects by effect media such as the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the effect actors 71 to 73, and the effect buttons 26 so as to synchronize with the effect performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24. Controlled by.

[Command reception processing by effect control unit 130]
FIG. 69 is a detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 69, the sub CPU 131 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the game control board 100 has been received (step S11). If it is determined that a command has not been received (step S11: NO), the process proceeds to step S30.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that a command from the game control board 100 has been received (step S11: YES), the command is controlled according to the process of step S219 (see FIG. 62) or step S229 (see FIG. 63). It is determined whether or not the hold command is transmitted from the substrate 100 (step S12). If it is determined that the command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), the process proceeds to step S15 described later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a hold command reception process (step S13). The hold command reception process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a pending command (step S12: NO), the sub CPU 131 is a variation start command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S311 (see FIG. 65). It is determined whether or not there is (step S15). If it is determined that the received command is not a change start command (step S15: NO), the process proceeds to step S19 described later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a change start command (step S15: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a change start command reception process (step S16). This variation start command receiving process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a change start command (step S15: NO), the symbol confirmation command transmitted from the game control board 100 in accordance with the process of step S316 (see FIG. 65). It is determined whether or not (step S19). If the sub CPU 131 determines that it is a symbol confirmation command (step S19: YES), it ends the decorative symbol variation display and stops displaying the decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the special symbol determination executed at the start of symbol variation. A variable effect end command for instructing execution of the process is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S20).

  By transmitting the variation effect end command to the image sound control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 by the process of step S30, the special symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is displayed. A decorative symbol indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 while being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42). The stop will be displayed.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is not a symbol confirmation command (step S19: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the command is an operation command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 (step S25). This operation command is a command transmitted from the lamp control board 150 to notify the information when the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 detects the operation of the effect button 26 and the effect key 27. Includes information indicating whether the effect button 26 or the effect key 27 is operated, information indicating which key is operated when the effect key 27 is operated, and the like. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the operation command has been received (step S25: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets an operation notification command including information included in the operation command in the sub RAM 133 (step S26). On the other hand, when it is determined that the received command is not an operation command (step S25: NO), another command corresponding to the received command is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S27).

[Reception command reception processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 70 is a detailed flowchart of the hold command reception process in step 13 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines that the received command is a hold command (step S12: YES), the number of special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 133 is incremented by “1” as illustrated in FIG. The updated value is updated (step S131). Specifically, based on the winning start information included in the advance determination information in the hold command, is the hold command related to the first special symbol determination or the hold command related to the second special symbol determination? , And based on the result of the determination, the number of reservations related to the first special symbol determination or the number of reservations related to the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding “1”. Then, the sub CPU 131 stores the advance determination information included in the received hold command in the sub RAM 133 (step S132).

  Next, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the reserved special symbol determination is the first special symbol determination based on the winning start information included in the received hold command (step S133).

  In the present embodiment, regarding the suspension of the first special symbol determination, based on the result of the prior determination process performed for the suspension, a normal icon change effect, a symbol icon change effect, a pressing icon change effect, a chance It is supposed to perform eye production. Here, the normal icon change effect is a hold prefetch effect that changes the hold icon and the display mode of the icon without using a decorative design. The 1 symbol icon change effect is an effect in which one symbol (Robo 1 symbol) alone changes the hold icon or the display mode of the icon (see FIG. 23). The push icon change effect is an effect of changing the hold icon or the display mode of the icon using the Robo 1 symbol and Robo 2 symbol (see FIGS. 24 to 27). The chance eye effect is an effect that displays the chance eye using the symbol variation corresponding to the first special symbol determination that is digested before the pre-reading target hold that is the target of the prior determination (see FIGS. 50 to 56). ). On the other hand, in this embodiment, the structure which does not perform these effects is employ | adopted with respect to suspension of a 2nd special symbol determination. For this reason, the following process is performed according to the determination result of step S133.

  That is, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the reserved special symbol determination is not the first special symbol determination (step S133: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes a process of step S143 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the reserved special symbol determination is the first special symbol determination (step S133: YES), the sub CPU 131 uses an icon change effect (normal icon change effect, 1 In order to determine whether or not to perform a symbol icon change effect or a pressing icon change effect), the following processing is executed.

  That is, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the reserved special symbol determination is the first special symbol determination (step S133: YES), the sub CPU 131 acquires an icon change effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S134). The icon change effect random number is incremented by “1” every time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time when the hold command is received as the icon change effect random number.

  When the icon change effect random number is acquired, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect (step S135). Specifically, in the sub ROM 132, random numbers are associated with each combination of the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the special symbol. On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 displays information indicating whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the prior determination information stored in the process of step S132 is a big hit, and the variation of the first special symbol. A random value corresponding to the information indicating the pattern is read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133. Then, it is determined whether or not the icon change effect is to be executed based on whether or not the icon change effect random number acquired in the process of step S134 matches any of the set random number values.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the following configuration is adopted for the random number value stored in the sub ROM 132. That is, more random numbers are associated with the combination whose determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” than the combination whose determination result of the first special symbol determination is “lost”. Yes. In addition, more random numbers are associated with combinations of variation patterns having a relatively long variation time of the first special symbol than combinations of variation patterns having a relatively short variation time of the first special symbol. It has been. For this reason, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the icon change effect is more easily executed as the reliability for the jackpot is higher, and conversely, the icon change effect is less likely to be executed as the reliability for the jackpot is lower.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines to execute the icon change effect (step S135: YES), that is, when the acquired icon change effect random number matches any random value set in the sub RAM 133, among the plurality of icon change effects. The icon change effect pattern selection process for determining which icon change effect is to be executed in what effect pattern is executed (step S136). This icon change effect pattern selection processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the icon change effect pattern selection process or determines not to execute the icon change effect (step S135: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether to execute the chance eye effect as follows. Execute the process.

  That is, when the sub CPU 131 executes the icon change effect pattern selection process in step S136 or determines that the icon change effect is not executed (step S135: NO), the sub CPU 131 acquires a chance eye effect random number and stores it in the sub RAM 133. (Step S139). The chance-like effect random number is incremented by “1” every time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time when the hold command is received as the chance-like effect random number.

  Upon acquiring the chance eye effect random number, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the chance eye effect (step S140). Specifically, in the sub ROM 132, random numbers are associated with each combination of the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the special symbol. On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 displays information indicating whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the prior determination information stored in the process of step S132 is a big hit, and the variation of the first special symbol. A random value corresponding to the information indicating the pattern is read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the chance eye effect based on whether or not the chance eye effect random number acquired in the process of step S139 matches any of the set random number values.

  Although a detailed description is omitted, the random number value of the chance-like effect random numbers stored in the sub ROM 132 is assigned with a tendency similar to the random number value of the icon change effect random numbers described above. For this reason, when the information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” is included in the prior determination information, it is easy to determine that the chance eye effect is executed, and conversely, the first special symbol is determined. When information indicating that the determination result is “losing” is included, it is difficult to determine that the chance eye effect is executed. Further, even if it is “losing”, when the variation time of the first special symbol specified based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the first special symbol included in the prior determination information is relatively long Is easily determined to execute the chance eye effect, and conversely, when the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively short, it is difficult to determine to execute the chance eye effect.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines to execute the chance eye effect (step S140: YES), that is, when the acquired chance eye effect random number matches any random value set in the sub RAM 133, the effect pattern of the chance eye effect is displayed. Chance eye effect pattern selection processing for selection is executed (step S141). The chance eye effect pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the reserved special symbol determination is not the first special symbol determination (step S133: NO), when the process of step S141 is executed, it is determined that the chance eye effect is not executed (step step). (S140: NO), an icon display command is set in the sub-RAM 143 (step S143).

  This icon display command is a command for instructing the display of the hold icon indicating that the special symbol determination is put on hold, and is sent to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150 by the command sending process in step S30. This icon display command includes winning start information, and the overall CPU 141 of the image sound control board 140 determines which of the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination is suspended, for example. Based on the winning start information, the hold icon is displayed in the corresponding display area (the hold area 51 if the first special symbol determination is held).

  Further, when an icon change effect pattern selection process in step S136 described later and a chance eye effect pattern selection process in step S141 are performed, an icon display command including setting information set in the sub RAM 133 by these selection processes. Is set in the sub RAM 133. Then, by transmitting an icon display command including such setting information to the image sound control board 140, an icon change effect and a chance eye effect are realized.

[Icon change effect pattern selection processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 71 is a detailed flowchart of icon change effect pattern selection processing in step S136 of FIG. If it is determined that the icon change effect is to be executed (step S135: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines which icon change effect is to be executed among the normal icon change effect, the one symbol icon change effect, and the pressing icon change effect. In order to do this, the following processing is executed.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 71, the sub CPU 131 reads the change effect selection table from the sub ROM 132 and sets it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1360). The sub ROM 132 has a jackpot change effect selection table to be referred to when the information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the pre-determination information is “big hit”, and is referred to when it is “lost”. A lost change effect selection table is stored. In step S1360, the sub CPU 131 reads a change effect selection table corresponding to information indicating whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the prior determination information is “big hit” from the sub ROM 132. Set in the sub RAM 133.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 acquires a change effect selection random number and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S 1361). The change effect selection random number is incremented by “1” every time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time when the hold command is received as the change effect selection random number.

  Sub CPU131 performs change production selection processing following processing of Step S1361 (Step S1362). Specifically, the effect type corresponding to the information indicating the variation pattern of the first special symbol included in the prior determination information and the changed effect selection random number acquired in the process of step S 1361 is set in the sub RAM 133. By reading from the change effect selection table, any one of the normal icon change effect, the one symbol icon change effect, and the pressing icon change effect is selected.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram of an example of the jackpot change effect selection table. When the information indicating whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 is “big hit” indicates “big hit”, the process of step S1360 This jackpot change effect selection table is read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133.

  As illustrated in FIG. 72, in the jackpot change effect selection table, a plurality of types of first special symbol variation patterns, an icon change effect effect type, and a random effect change random number value are associated with each other. Yes. The range that the change effect selection random number can take is set to “0” to “99” in the present embodiment for convenience of explanation. On the other hand, in the jackpot change effect selection table, one of random values “0” to “99” is associated with each of the three types of icon change effects.

  For example, the sub CPU 131 indicates that the information indicating whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the pre-determination information is “big hit” indicates “big hit”, and the fluctuation of the first special symbol When the information indicating the pattern indicates a variation pattern N of 120-second variation, one of the effect types associated with the variation pattern N in the jackpot change effect selection table illustrated in FIG. 72 is read. For example, if the change effect selection random number acquired in step S 1361 is “5”, the normal icon change effect is read as the effect type. For example, when the change effect selection random number acquired in the process of step S 1361 is “82”, the pressing icon change effect is read as the effect type.

  In FIG. 72, only the allocation of random values corresponding to each effect type of the variation pattern N is illustrated, but the other variation patterns are each randomly allocated with an allocation different from the allocation of random values for the variation pattern N. Numeric values are associated. The same applies to the lost change effect selection table (not shown).

  Returning to FIG. 71, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the normal icon change effect following the processing of step S1362 (step S1363). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to execute the normal icon change effect based on whether or not the effect type read in the process of step S1362 is a normal icon change effect.

  When it is determined that the normal icon change effect is to be executed (step S1363: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a normal icon change effect pattern selection process (step S1364). Specifically, the initial display color of the hold icon to be newly displayed in the hold area 51, the final display color of the hold icon, and the change pattern from the initial display color to the final display color are held. A change pattern indicating whether to change the display color of the icon is determined.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal icon change effect is not executed (step S1363: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the one symbol icon change effect is executed (step S1365). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to execute the one symbol icon change effect based on whether or not the effect type read out in the process of step S1362 is the one symbol icon change effect.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines to execute the one symbol icon change effect (step S1365: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a one symbol icon change effect pattern selection process for selecting an effect pattern of the one symbol icon change effect (step S1366). . This one symbol icon change effect pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines not to execute one symbol icon change effect (step S1365: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes a pressing icon change effect pattern selection process for selecting an effect pattern of the press icon change effect (step S1376). ). The pressing icon change effect pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the icon change effect is to be executed by the process of step S135 of FIG. 70, and when it is determined that the icon change effect is to be executed, the normal icon change effect, the one symbol icon change effect, A case where either one of the push icon change effects is selected will be described. In contrast, whether to perform an icon change effect before the start of the change of the prefetch target and whether to perform an icon change effect during the change of the prefetch target are determined by, for example, a lottery using a random number, for example. The type of icon change effect may be determined based on these determination results.

  For example, if it is determined that an icon change effect is to be performed before the start of the change of the prefetch target, any one of the normal icon change effect, the one-pattern icon change effect, and the pressing icon change effect is selected as the icon change effect. To do.

  For example, when it is determined that an icon change effect is to be performed during the change of the prefetch target, any one of the normal icon change effect, the one-pattern icon change effect, and the pressing icon change effect is selected as the icon change effect. To do.

  In this way, when it is determined whether to execute the icon change effect before and during the start of the change of the prefetch target, both before the start of the change of the prefetch target and during the change There is a case where it is decided to execute the icon change effect. In this case, for example, a normal icon change effect is executed before the start of the change of the prefetch target, and a push icon change effect is executed during the change of the prefetch target. This makes it possible to effectively improve the interest of the icon change effect.

  The pattern in which a plurality of icon change effects are combined is not limited to the above. For example, one symbol icon change effect is executed before the start of the change of the prefetch target, and the preread target is being changed. In some cases, a pattern of executing a normal icon change effect is selected. Further, for example, an icon change effect of the same type is performed such that a push icon change effect is executed before the start of the change of the prefetch target, and a push icon change effect is also executed during the change of the prefetch target. In some cases, the pattern to be selected is selected.

  Further, for example, when the icon change effect is executed before the start of the change of the prefetch target, any one of the three types of icon change effects is based on the change pattern of the prefetch target hold icon. May be selected. Specifically, for a change pattern in which the display color of the hold icon is changed from white to a color of green or higher without passing through blue, the push icon change effect is selected, and other effect patterns (for example, change from white to blue) With respect to the pattern), a scenario in which a normal icon change effect or one symbol icon change effect is selected may be determined in advance, and an executable icon change effect may be selected based on this scenario.

[One Symbol Icon Changing Effect Pattern Selection Process by Effect Control Board 130]
FIG. 73 is a detailed flowchart of one symbol icon change effect pattern selection processing in step S1366 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines to execute the one symbol icon change effect (step S1365: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes the following process to determine the effect pattern of the one symbol icon change effect (see FIG. 23).

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 73, the sub CPU 131 reads an effect pattern selection table for 1 symbol icon change effect according to the number of first special symbol determination pending and the prior determination information from the sub ROM 132 and stores it in the sub RAM 133. Set (step S1367). Specifically, the sub ROM 132 stores a jackpot effect pattern selection table and a loss effect pattern selection table for each number of first special symbol determination suspensions. The sub CPU 131 indicates that the number of first special symbol determination pending stored in the sub RAM 133 and the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 in the process of step S132 are “big hits”. Is read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133. For example, when the number of holds for the first special symbol determination is “3” and the information indicating the determination result included in the prior determination information indicates “big hit”, the big hit effect pattern selection table for hold 3 is read from the sub ROM 132. Is set in the sub RAM 133.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 acquires one symbol icon change random number and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1368). This 1-design icon change random number is incremented by “1” every time the above-described random number update process is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time when the hold command is received as the 1-design icon change random number.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 determines the display position of the icon when the one symbol icon change effect is executed and the display color of the icon after the one symbol icon change effect, and sets the determination result as the setting of the one symbol icon change effect. Information is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S1369). In the process of step S 1369, whether to perform a one-design icon change effect when the icon is displayed in the area 52, or to perform a one-design icon change effect when the icon is displayed in the hold area 51, If it is performed when it is displayed in the reserved area 51, it is performed at which position in the reserved area 51, which color is used to display the icon color after performing one symbol icon change effect, etc. 1 symbol icon change effect pattern that is associated with is determined.

  Specifically, the process of step S1369 is performed as follows. That is, in the effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 133 in the process of step S1367, random numbers are associated with combinations of the first special symbol variation pattern and the plurality of one symbol icon change effect patterns, respectively. Yes. On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 corresponds to the information indicating the variation pattern of the first special symbol included in the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 and the one symbol icon change random number acquired in the process of step S1368. One symbol icon change effect pattern is selected by reading the one symbol icon change effect pattern from the effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 133. Then, information indicating the selection result is set as setting information.

  The setting information set in the sub-RAM 133 in this way is sent to the image sound control board 140 in a form included in the icon display command transmitted to the image sound control board 140 in accordance with the process of step S143 (see FIG. 70). Sent. Then, by performing the drawing control of the VDP 142 based on this setting information, the one symbol icon changing effect described above based on FIG. 23 is realized.

[Pressing Icon Change Effect Pattern Selection Processing by Effect Control Board 130]
FIG. 74 is a detailed flowchart of the pressing icon change effect pattern selection process in step S1376 of FIG. When the sub CPU 131 determines not to execute the one symbol icon change effect (step S1365: NO), the sub CPU 131 executes the following processing to determine the effect pattern of the pressing icon change effect (see FIGS. 24 to 27). .

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 74, the sub CPU 131 reads an effect pattern selection table for the pressing icon change effect according to the number of first special symbol determination pending and the prior determination information from the sub ROM 132 and stores it in the sub RAM 133. Set (step S1377). Specifically, the sub ROM 132 stores a jackpot effect pattern selection table and a loss effect pattern selection table for each number of first special symbol determination suspensions. The sub CPU 131 indicates that the number of first special symbol determination pending stored in the sub RAM 133 and the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 in the process of step S132 are “big hits”. Is read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133. For example, when the number of holds for the first special symbol determination is “2” and the information indicating the determination result included in the pre-determination information indicates “lost”, the effect pattern selection table for hold 2 for losing is read from the sub ROM 132. Is set in the sub RAM 133.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 acquires the pressing icon change random number and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1378). The push icon change random number is incremented by “1” every time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 131 obtains the count value at the time when the hold command is received as the push icon change random number.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 determines the display position of the icon when executing the pressing icon change effect and the display color of the icon after the pressing icon change effect, and sets the determination result as the setting of the pressing icon change effect. Information is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S1379). In the process of step S1379, whether the push icon change effect is performed when the icon is displayed in the area 52, or whether the push icon change effect is performed when the icon is displayed in the hold area 51, If it is performed when it is displayed in the holding area 51, which position in the holding area 51 is displayed, what color the icon color is displayed after the push icon change effect is performed, etc. The pressing icon change effect pattern that is associated with is determined.

  Specifically, the process of step S1379 is performed as follows. That is, in the effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 133 in the process of step S1377, random numbers are associated with the combinations of the first special symbol variation pattern and the plurality of pressing icon change effect patterns, respectively. Yes. On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 corresponds to the information indicating the variation pattern of the first special symbol included in the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 and the pressing icon change random number acquired in the process of step S1378. By reading the pressing icon change effect pattern from the effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 133, one pressing icon change effect pattern is selected. Then, information indicating the selection result is set as setting information.

  The setting information set in the sub-RAM 133 in this way is sent to the image sound control board 140 in a form included in the icon display command transmitted to the image sound control board 140 in accordance with the process of step S143 (see FIG. 70). Sent. Then, by performing drawing control of the VDP 142 based on this setting information, the pressing icon change effect described above based on FIGS. 24 to 27 is realized.

  In addition, the case where the effect pattern of 1 symbol icon change effect and pressing icon change effect was determined based on prior determination information was demonstrated here. On the other hand, regarding the case where these effects are performed using the icon displayed in the area 52, not based on the prior determination information, but based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of symbol variation. Whether or not to produce an effect and an effect pattern in the case of executing the effect may be determined.

[Chance eye effect pattern selection process by effect control board 130]
FIG. 75 is a detailed flowchart of the chance eye effect pattern selection process in step S141 of FIG. If the sub CPU 131 determines in the process of step S140 (see FIG. 70) to execute the chance eye effect (step S140: YES), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to actually execute the chance eye effect, and executes the chance eye effect. In order to determine the effect pattern of the chance eye effect (see FIGS. 50 to 56), the following processing is executed.

  That is, as illustrated in FIG. 75, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the design variation of the reach effect is performed before the design variation corresponding to the prefetch target hold is digested (step S1410). Specifically, for example, a variation pattern corresponding to an effect with reach is selected based on variation pattern setting information included in the hold command received from the game control unit 100 prior to the hold command received this time. It is determined whether or not the design variation of the reachable effect is performed based on the specified result. Here, when it is determined that the design variation of the presence effect is performed (step S1410: YES), the process proceeds to step S143.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the design variation of the effect with reach is not performed (step S1410: NO), the production pattern selection for the chance eye effect according to the number of the first special symbol determination and the prior determination information The table is read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1411). Specifically, the sub ROM 132 stores a jackpot effect pattern selection table and a loss effect pattern selection table for each number of first special symbol determination suspensions. The sub CPU 131 indicates that the number of first special symbol determination pending stored in the sub RAM 133 and the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 in the process of step S132 are “big hits”. Is read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133. For example, when the number of holds for the first special symbol determination is “1” and the information indicating the determination result included in the prior determination information indicates “big hit”, the big hit effect pattern selection table for hold 1 is read from the sub ROM 132. Is set in the sub RAM 133.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 acquires a chance eye pattern random number and stores it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1412). This chance eye pattern random number is incremented by “1” every time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time when the hold command is received as the chance eye pattern random number.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 determines how many chances are displayed before the symbol variation corresponding to the first special symbol determination that has been subject to the prior determination is started. A chance eye effect pattern representing a combination of eyes and which of the strong chance eyes is displayed is determined, and the determination result is set in the sub-RAM 133 as setting information of the chance eye effect (step S1413). .

  Specifically, the process of step S1413 is performed as follows. That is, in the effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 133 in the process of step S1411, the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the effect pattern of a plurality of chance eye effects (for example, when performing the second chance effect effect) In combination with multiple chance patterns such as weak chance → medium chance, weak chance → strong chance, weak chance → weak chance, medium chance → strong chance, medium chance → medium chance On the other hand, random values are associated with each other. On the other hand, the sub CPU 131 has a chance corresponding to the information indicating the variation pattern of the first special symbol included in the prior determination information stored in the sub RAM 133 and the chance eye pattern random number acquired in the process of step S1412. By reading the eye effect pattern from the effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 133, one chance eye effect pattern is selected. Then, information indicating the selection result is set as setting information.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, based on the setting information set in the sub-RAM 133 in this way, it is determined in what combination the decorative symbols are to be pseudo-stopped and the actual stop is performed. A variable effect start command including the information shown is transmitted to the image sound control board 140. Then, by performing drawing control of the VDP 142 based on this information, the chance eye effect described above based on FIGS. 50 to 56 is realized.

  Note that the chance eye effect is basically an effect that can only be performed using fluctuations in which a reachless effect is performed. This is because when a reach effect is performed, a reach symbol is selected based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination or the like, and therefore, chances cannot be freely formed. For this reason, the process described above based on FIG. 75 is limited to the case where all of the symbol fluctuations before the suspension of the first special symbol determination subject to the prior determination process is performed are those without reach. Done.

[Variation start command reception processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 76 is a detailed flowchart of the change start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. If the sub CPU 131 determines that the command received from the game control board 100 is a change start command (step S15: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG.

  That is, the sub CPU 131 acquires a value at the time when the change start command is received from the game control board 100 and stores it in the sub RAM 133 with respect to the effect random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update process described above (step S160). Then, the received variation start command is analyzed (step S161).

  In this variation start command, as described above, the symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, whether the symbol setting information relates to the first special symbol determination, or relates to the second special symbol determination It includes winning start information indicating whether it is a thing, setting information of a special symbol variation pattern, information indicating a gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like. Therefore, the type and result of the special symbol determination can be specified by analyzing the variation start command. That is, it is possible to identify the type of jackpot if the jackpot is a jackpot, a loss, or a jackpot. Further, by specifying whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern for loss based on the variation pattern setting information, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach. . Similarly, the variation time of the special symbol can be specified based on the variation pattern setting information. Further, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

  When the variation start command is analyzed, the sub CPU 131 executes variation effect pattern selection processing for selecting a variation effect pattern of the variation effect accompanying the variation display of the special symbol based on the analysis result (step S162). By executing this variation effect pattern selection process, the decorative pattern variation mode, the presence or absence of the reach effect, the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous notice effect, the type of the decorative pattern constituting the reach symbol, the type or content of the reach effect, the pseudo continuous The content of the notice effect, the type of decorative symbol to be stopped and the like are determined. This variation effect pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIGS. 77 to 79.

  Subsequently, the sub CPU 131 executes a notice effect pattern selection process for selecting the contents of various notice effects to be executed when the decorative symbol is variably displayed with the variable effect pattern selected in the process of step S162 (step S166). . By executing the process of step S166, the button effect described above based on FIGS. 11 to 14, the 5 symbol suggestive effect described above based on FIGS. 32 to 34, and the above described based on FIGS. 37 to 39. 7 symbol suggestion effect, 9 symbol roulette effect described above based on FIGS. 40-41, SPSP direct development suggestion effect described above based on FIG. 42, zone entry suggestion effect described above based on FIGS. 43-44, FIG. Whether or not to execute the effects for the vehicle alignment effect described above based on FIG. 46, the specific reach development suggestion effect described above based on FIG. 47, the vehicle symbol slip effect described above based on FIGS. In the case of executing an effect, what kind of effect pattern is to be executed is determined.

  Note that these announcement effects are all performed using decorative symbols. However, in the process of step S166, it is determined how to control these decorative symbols and execute these announcement effects. In the process of S162, other decorative pattern variation patterns are set.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 sub-commands a variable effect start command for instructing the start of the change effect in the change effect pattern selected in the process of step S162 and the start of the notice effect in the notice effect pattern selected in the process of step S166. It is set in the RAM 133 (step S170).

  This variable effect start command includes information indicating the variable effect pattern selected by the process of step S162 and information indicating the notice effect pattern selected by the process of step S166. The command transmission process of step S30 Is transmitted to the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150. As a result, the fluctuating effect and the notice effect in which the effect pattern is determined on the effect control board 130 are realized by the image sound control board 140 and the lamp control board 150.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S170, the sub CPU 131 subtracts “1” from the number of suspensions stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S171). Specifically, when the change start command received from the game control board 100 is to notify the start of the symbol change related to the first special symbol determination, the number of suspension of the first special symbol determination is decremented by “1”. Update to the specified value. On the other hand, if the received change start command is for notifying the start of symbol variation related to the second special symbol determination, the number of pending special symbol determinations is updated to a value obtained by subtracting “1”.

[Variation effect pattern selection processing by effect control board 130]
77 to 79 are detailed flowcharts of the variation effect pattern selection processing in step S162 of FIG. Here, the variation effect pattern selection process when the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination is received will be described, and the variation effect pattern selection process when the variation start command related to the second special symbol determination is received Will not be described.

  Sub CPU131 judges whether the judgment result of this 1st special symbol judgment of this time is "big hit" following the process of step S161 (step S1621). Specifically, based on the symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process included in the variation start command received from the game control board 100, the determination result of the first special symbol determination of this time is “big hit” It is determined whether or not. If it is determined that the game is a big hit (step S1621: YES), the process proceeds to step S1633 (see FIG. 78) described later.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the current determination result of the first special symbol determination is not “big hit” (step S1621: NO), the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not an effect with reach needs to be performed (step S1622). ). Specifically, based on the variation pattern setting information included in the variation start command received from the game control board 100, it is determined whether it is necessary to perform an effect with reach. Here, when it is determined that it is necessary to perform an effect with reach (step S1622: YES), the process proceeds to step S1643 (see FIG. 79) described later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that it is not necessary to perform the effect with reach (step S1622: NO), that is, when it is necessary to perform the effect without reach, the chance eye effect set by the process of step S1413 (see FIG. 75). It is determined whether or not the setting information is stored in the sub-RAM 133 (step S1623).

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the setting information for the chance eye effect is not stored (step S <b> 1623: NO), the sub CPU 131 selects three decorative symbols composed of an odd symbol excluding 7 symbols and an even symbol as lost symbols. (Step S1624). That is, a combination of three symbols to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 (including a pseudo stop) when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed is selected so as not to constitute a chance. The method of selecting the symbol combination is not particularly limited. For example, a method of selecting by symbol selection using a table in which a random value is associated with each of a plurality of symbol combinations is given as an example. .

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that the setting information for the chance is stored in the sub RAM 133 (step S1623: YES), the chance CPU to display at the end of the current symbol variation is based on the setting information. It is determined whether or not it is a weak chance (step S1625). Here, when it is determined that there is a weak chance (step S1625: YES), a combination of three even symbols is selected as a lost symbol (step S1626). That is, the even number symbols to be stopped in the left column, the even number symbols to be stopped in the middle column, and the even number symbols to be stopped in the right column are selected so as to be lost.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the chance item to be displayed at the end of the current symbol variation is not the weak chance item (step S1625: NO), the sub CPU 131 also determines that at the end of the current symbol variation based on the setting information of the chance item. It is determined whether or not the chance to be displayed is the middle chance (step S1627). Here, when it is determined that it is the middle chance (step S1627: YES), a combination of three odd symbols not including 7 symbols is selected as a lost symbol (step S1628). That is, the odd symbols to be stopped in the left column, the odd symbols to be stopped in the middle column, and the odd symbols to be stopped in the right column are selected so as to be lost. On the contrary, when it is determined that it is not the middle chance (step S1627: NO), that is, when it is necessary to display the strong chance at the end of the current symbol variation, the combination of three odd symbols including seven symbols is lost. A symbol is selected (step S1629). That is, it is determined to which column the 7 symbols are stopped, and an odd number other than the 7 symbols to be stopped in the remaining columns is selected.

  The sub CPU 131 executes the process of step S1624, the process of step S1626, the process of step S1628, or the process of step S1629 to select a lost symbol, and then selects a variation effect pattern of non-reach loss (step S1630). That is, how to change the decorative design of each column before the stop symbol selected in any of the above four steps is displayed is selected from a plurality of predetermined patterns. Decide by.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the current determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” (step S1621: YES), the big hit stored in the sub ROM 132 is exemplified as shown in FIG. The variable effect pattern selection table is read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1633). This jackpot variation effect pattern selection table executes the reach effect with what kind of pattern the three rows of decorative symbols are varied with respect to each of the variation patterns of the plurality of first special symbols. Or, whether or not to execute a pseudo-continuous notice effect, and if a pseudo-continuous notice effect is to be executed, a random effect value is associated with a variation effect pattern of a decorative pattern, such as how many lines to develop. is there.

  Sub CPU131 acquires jackpot variation production pattern selection random number following processing of Step S1633, and stores it in sub RAM133 (Step S1634). The jackpot variation effect pattern selection random number is incremented by “1” every time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time when the variation start command is received as the jackpot variation effect pattern selection random number.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 selects a jackpot variation effect pattern (step S1635). Specifically, the variation pattern indicated by the variation information of the variation pattern of the first special symbol included in the variation start command received from the game control board 100, and the jackpot variation effect pattern selection random number acquired in the process of step S1634 Is read from the jackpot variation effect pattern selection table set in the sub-RAM 133, and one jackpot variation effect pattern is selected.

  Sub CPU131 reads the jackpot reach symbol selection table described above based on FIG. 20 from sub ROM 132 and sets it in sub RAM 133 following the processing of step S1635 (step S1636). Then, the reach symbol selection random number is acquired and stored in the sub-RAM 133 (step S1637). This reach symbol selection random number is incremented by “1” every time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time when the change start command is received as the reach symbol selection random number. Then, the sub CPU 131 selects a reach symbol (step S1638). More specifically, the final reach design corresponding to the reach design finally performed in the jackpot variation production pattern selected in step S1635 and the reach design selection random number acquired in step S1637 is selected as the jackpot reach design. Reach symbols are selected by reading from the table.

  Although not shown in FIG. 78, when the final reach symbol is selected for the increase reach effect, as described above with reference to FIG. Whether to notify or in what pattern to increase the reach symbol is also determined.

  Sub CPU131 judges whether the jackpot variation effect pattern selected by the process of step S1635 is a variation effect pattern in which a pseudo continuous notice effect is performed following the process of step S1638 (step S1639). Here, when it is determined that the variation effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous notice effect is performed (step S1639: YES), the pseudo continuous symbol selection process is executed (step S1640). Specifically, whether to stop the 3 symbols or 7 symbols when you develop from the pseudo 1st to the 2nd pseudo or when you develop from the 2nd pseudo to the 3rd pseudo. decide. For example, in the case where only the pseudo second series is developed, since the seven symbols that are determined to be developed to the pseudo third series cannot be selected at the stage of stopping, the three symbols are selected as the pseudo continuous symbols. Further, in the case of finally developing to the pseudo third series, the pseudo continuous symbols to be stopped when developing from the pseudo first series to the pseudo second series are randomly selected as 3 symbols or 7 symbols. Here, when 3 symbols are selected, the pseudo-continuous symbols to be stopped when developing from the pseudo 2nd to the pseudo 3rd are randomly selected as 3 symbols or 7 symbols. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous symbol to be stopped when developing from the pseudo first to second pseudo-station is selected as 7 symbols, the pseudo-continuous symbol to be stopped when developing from the pseudo second to the third pseudo-sequence is also included. Select 7 symbols.

  When the sub CPU 131 executes the pseudo-continuous symbol selection process in the process of step S1640 as described above, or determines that it is not the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous notice effect is performed (step S1639: NO), the first special A decorative symbol to be confirmed (mainly stopped) at the end of symbol variation is selected (step S1641). In addition, there may be a promotion effect related to the decorative symbols before the three rows of decorative symbols are actually stopped. In this step S1641, a decorative symbol different from the reach symbol selected in the process of step S1638 is selected as the jackpot symbol. May be.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 131 determines that it is necessary to perform the effect with reach (step S1622: YES), as shown in FIG. 79, the variation effect pattern selection table for reach with loss stored in the sub ROM 132 is illustrated. Are read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1643). This reach variation pattern selection table for reach has a reach effect with what kind of pattern to change the three rows of decorative symbols for each of the variation patterns of the first special symbols. Random values are associated with decorative design variation effect patterns such as whether to execute, pseudo continuous notice effect, whether to execute pseudo continuous notice effect, and how many stations to develop. Is.

  Sub CPU131 acquires the reach loss variation effect pattern selection random number and stores it in sub RAM 133 following the processing of step S1643 (step S1644). This reach-losing variation effect pattern selection random number is incremented by “1” every time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time when the variation start command is received as the reach-losing variation effect pattern selection random number.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 selects a reach variation effect pattern with reach (step S1645). Specifically, the variation pattern indicated by the variation information of the variation pattern of the first special symbol included in the variation start command received from the game control board 100, the reach lose variation variation effect pattern selection random number obtained in the process of step S1644, By reading from the variation effect pattern selection table for reach with loss that is set in the sub-RAM 133, the one variation change effect pattern with reach is selected.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S1645, the sub CPU 131 reads the above-mentioned reach reach symbol selection table for losing based on FIG. 19 from the sub ROM 132 and sets it in the sub RAM 133 (step S1646). Then, the reach symbol selection random number is acquired and stored in the sub-RAM 133 (step S1647). This reach symbol selection random number is incremented by “1” every time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time when the change start command is received as the reach symbol selection random number. Then, the sub CPU 131 selects a reach symbol (step S1648). Specifically, the reach reach for the final reach corresponding to the reach effect finally performed in the reach variation pattern with reach selected in step S1645 and the reach design selection random number acquired in step S1647 is reached. A reach symbol is selected by reading from the symbol selection table.

  Although not shown in FIG. 79, when the final reach symbol is selected for the increase reach production, as described above with reference to FIG. 19, the reach symbol combination is increased or the reach symbol is increased in any pattern. This is also determined.

  Sub-CPU 131 determines whether the loss-with-reaching variation effect pattern selected in step S1645 is a variation effect pattern in which a pseudo continuous notice effect is performed following step S1648 (step S1649). Here, when it is determined that the variation effect pattern in which the pseudo-continuous notice effect is performed (step S1649: YES), the pseudo-continuous symbol selection process is executed (step S1650). Since this pseudo-continuous symbol selection process is performed in the same manner as the process in step S1640 described above, a detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  When the sub CPU 131 thus executes the pseudo-continuous symbol selection process in the process of step S1650 or determines that it is not the variable effect pattern in which the pseudo continuous notice effect is performed (step S1649: NO), the first special A decorative symbol to be confirmed (mainly stopped) at the end of symbol variation is selected (step S1651).

[Notification effect pattern selection processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 80 is a detailed flowchart of the notice effect pattern selection process in step S166 of FIG. Sub-CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the button effect described above based on FIGS. 11 to 14 following the process of step S162 in FIG. 76, and if it determines to execute the button effect, the effect pattern. The button effect pattern selection process for determining is performed (step S1661). The button effect pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S1661, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the above-described 5 symbol suggestion effect based on FIG. 32 to FIG. 5 symbol suggestion effect pattern selection processing for determining the pattern is executed (step S1674). This 5 symbol suggestion effect pattern selection processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S1674, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the 9 symbol roulette effect described above based on FIGS. 40 to 41, and if it determines to execute the 9 symbol roulette effect, that effect. A 9-design roulette effect pattern selection process for determining a pattern is executed (step S1682). The 9-design roulette effect pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1682, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the SPSP direct development suggestion described above based on FIG. SPSP direct development suggestive effect pattern selection processing is executed to determine (step S1691). This SPSP direct development suggestion effect pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1691, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the zone entry suggestion effect described above based on FIGS. 43 to 44. A zone entry suggestion effect pattern selection process for determining a pattern is executed (step S1697). The zone entry suggestion effect pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1697, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the above-described vehicle symbol matching effect based on FIGS. 45 to 46, and if it determines to execute the vehicle symbol matching effect, that effect. Car pattern matching effect pattern selection processing for determining a pattern is executed (step S1703). This vehicle pattern matching effect pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S1703, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the above-described vehicle symbol slip effect based on FIGS. 48 to 49, and if it determines to execute the vehicle symbol slip effect, that effect. Car design slip effect pattern selection processing for determining the pattern is executed (step S1709). This vehicle symbol slip effect pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1709, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the above-described specific reach development suggesting effect based on FIG. Specific reach development suggestion effect pattern selection processing is executed (step S1715). The specific reach development suggesting effect pattern selection process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S1715, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not to execute the above-described 7 symbol suggestion effect based on FIGS. 37 to 39. 7 symbol suggestion effect pattern selection processing for determining the pattern is executed (step S1720). This 7 symbol suggestion effect pattern selection processing will be described in detail later based on FIG.

[Button effect pattern selection processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 81 is a detailed flowchart of the button effect pattern selection process in step S1661 of FIG. Sub-CPU 131 determines whether or not the variation effect pattern corresponding to the button effect pattern has been selected as illustrated in FIG. 81 following the variation effect pattern selection process in step S162 (see FIG. 76) (step S162). S1662). In the variation effect pattern selection process in step S162, there may be a case where a variation effect pattern capable of executing various button effects described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14 is selected, or various button effects cannot be executed. In some cases, a variable production pattern is selected. For example, when the variation time of the first special symbol is 3 seconds and the variation effect pattern is selected such that the three rows of decorative symbols start and stop simultaneously, the effective period of the button effect is secured. Therefore, it is impossible to execute various button effects, and in this sense, it can be said that the variable effect pattern exemplified here is a variable effect pattern that does not correspond to the button effect. Therefore, in step S1662, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the variation effect pattern selected in the process of step S162 is a predetermined corresponding variation effect pattern when any button effect is performed. If it is determined that the pattern does not correspond to the corresponding variation effect pattern (step S1662: NO), the process proceeds to the five symbol suggestion effect pattern selection process in step S1674.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that any one of the button effects is a predetermined corresponding variation effect pattern (step S1662: YES), the sub CPU 131 first sets an effective period (step S1663). Then, when the effective period arrives (in the case of the fourth button effect, the latter half effective period (see FIG. 14D)), it is determined whether to maintain the effect button 26 in the normal state or to control it in the protruding state. The state pattern determination table is read from the sub ROM 132 and set in the sub RAM 133 (step S1664). Although detailed explanation is omitted, this state pattern determination table includes a jackpot and a loser, and controls to a protruding state and maintains a normal state for each variation pattern of the first special symbol. Different random numbers are associated with each other. That is, the big hit state pattern determination table is more easily selected when controlled to the protruding state than the loser, and the longer the variation time of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select when the protruding state is controlled. A random value is assigned to each variation pattern of each table. The sub CPU 131 determines whether the jackpot is based on the symbol setting information indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process included in the received fluctuation start command. A big hit state pattern determination table is set, and if it is determined that it is not “big hit”, a loss state pattern determination table is set.

  Sub CPU131 acquires a state pattern selection random number, and sets it to subRAM133 following the process of step S1664 (step S1665). This state pattern selection random number is incremented by “1” every time the random number update process described above is performed, and the sub CPU 131 acquires the count value at the time when the change start command is received as the state pattern selection random number. Then, the sub CPU 131 selects a state pattern of the effect button 26 (step S1666). Specifically, with reference to the state pattern determination table set in the sub RAM 133, the process of step S1665 is performed on the variation pattern indicated by the variation information of the first special symbol variation pattern included in the received variation start command. It is determined whether or not the production button 26 is controlled to the protruding state based on whether the state pattern selection random number acquired in step 1 is associated with maintaining the normal state or controlling the protruding state. To do.

  Sub CPU131 determines the effect image displayed during an effective period following the process of step S1666 (step S1667). That is, a corresponding effect image is selected based on which button effect of the first button effect to the fourth button effect illustrated in FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 determines the contents of the effect of the operation corresponding effect that is performed when the effect button 26 is operated during the effective period (step S1668). Specifically, a table for selecting any one of a plurality of types of effect images suggesting different degrees of reliability for each jackpot is stored in the sub ROM 132, and the sub CPU 131 includes a jackpot included in the change start command. By reading from the above table the design information indicating the determination result of the determination process, the setting information of the special pattern variation pattern, and the effect image type corresponding to the random number obtained when the variation start command is received, for example. One effect image to be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 is selected as the corresponding effect.

  Sub-CPU 131 determines whether or not the valid period is after reach is established following the process of step S1668 (step S1669). Specifically, for the variation effect pattern selected in step S162, the effective period is after reach is established based on whether the effective period set in step S1663 is before reach is established. Whether or not (step S1669). Here, when it is determined that the validity period is after reach is established (step S1669: YES), the effect contents of the reach symbol deformation effect are determined (step S1670). That is, the effect pattern of the reach symbol deformation action as illustrated in FIG. 11C is determined, and the determination result is set in the sub RAM 133 as setting information. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effective period is not after reach establishment (step S1669: NO), the contents of the effect of the state suggestion effect are determined (step S1671). Specifically, based on the selection result of S1666, when the effect button 26 is maintained in the normal state when the effective period comes, the effect display illustrated in FIGS. 12A-1 and 13A is displayed. The production content is determined so as to be performed before the effective period. On the other hand, when the effect button 26 is controlled to be in the protruding state when the effective period comes, the contents of the effect are determined so that the effect display illustrated in FIG. 12B-1 is performed before the effective period.

[5-design suggesting effect pattern selection processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 82 is a detailed flowchart of the 5-symbol suggestive effect pattern selection process in step S1674 of FIG. Sub CPU131 follows the button effect pattern selection process of step S1661, whether or not the change effect pattern selected in the process of step S162 is a corresponding change effect pattern corresponding to the five symbol suggestion effects (see FIGS. 32 to 34). Is determined in the same manner as in step S1662 (step S1675). Here, when it is determined that the pattern is not the corresponding variation effect pattern (step S1675: NO), the process proceeds to the nine symbol roulette effect pattern selection process in step S1682.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the corresponding variation effect pattern is set (step S1675: YES), for example, it executes a lottery using a random number, and determines whether or not to execute the five symbol suggestion effect based on the lottery result. Determination is made (step S1676). In the case of the corresponding variation effect pattern, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that the five symbol suggestion effect is executed unconditionally.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines to execute the 5 symbol suggestion effect (step S1676: YES), the sub CPU 131 specifies the suggestable content based on the variation effect pattern selected in the process of step S162 (step S1677). Then, based on the identification result, the suggested content suggested by the five symbols transformed into the robot symbol is selected (step S1678). For example, when the losing eye stops immediately after executing the 5 symbol suggestion effect, the losing eye suggestion effect illustrated in FIG. 32 is selected as the effect content. For example, when it is set to stop the chance eye due to the current fluctuation, the chance eye suggestion effect illustrated in FIG. 33 is selected as the effect content. When there are a plurality of suggestion contents that can be selected, for example, a lottery using a random number is performed to select any one.

  Then, the sub CPU 131 selects an effect pattern indicating what kind of action is to be performed on the robot 5 symbol and suggests the suggested content selected in step S1678, and the selection result is set to 5 symbol suggestion effect. Information is set in the sub-RAM 133 (step S1679).

[9 design roulette effect pattern selection processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 83 is a detailed flowchart of the 9-design roulette effect pattern selection process in step S1682 of FIG. Subsequent to the process in step S1674, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the variation effect pattern selected in the process in step S162 is a cannon variation effect pattern corresponding to the nine symbol roulette effect (see FIGS. 40 and 41). (Step S1683). The determination process in step S1683 is performed in the same manner as the determination process in step S1662 (see FIG. 81). If it is determined that the pattern is not the corresponding variation effect pattern (step S1683: NO), the process proceeds to step S1691 described later.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the corresponding variation effect pattern is set (step S1683: YES), for example, a lottery using a random number is executed, and whether or not a nine symbol roulette effect is executed based on the lottery result is determined. Determination is made (step S1684). In the case of the corresponding variation effect pattern, a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that the nine symbol roulette effect is executed unconditionally.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the 9 symbol roulette effect is to be executed (step S1684: YES), the sub CPU 131 sets an effective period related to the button operation of the 9 symbol roulette effect for the variable effect pattern selected in the process of step S162 ( Step S1685). Then, as shown in FIGS. 40E to 40H, four panel groups to be displayed in order are selected (step S1686). Specifically, panel group information indicating a combination of four panels is stored in the sub ROM 132 for each variation effect pattern selected in the process of step S162, and the sub CPU 131 selects the process in step S162. One panel group is selected by reading panel group information corresponding to the variation effect pattern from the sub ROM 132 and setting it in the sub RAM 133. Based on this selection result, the 9-design roulette effect is performed, thereby realizing the effect display shown in FIGS. 40E to 40G that sequentially show the four panels that may be stopped. Will be.

  Next, the sub CPU 131 selects a panel to be displayed in response to a button operation within the valid period (step S1687). Specifically, when there is one panel that may be displayed in the panel group selected in the process of step S1686, that panel is selected, and when there are a plurality of panels that may be displayed, For example, a lottery using a random number is performed at a timing when an operation is performed, and any one panel is selected based on the lottery result.

  Then, the sub CPU 131 finally determines a 9 symbol roulette effect effect pattern such as what kind of action is performed on the two robots 9 symbols and the order in which the four panels are displayed. The result is set in the sub MRA 133 as setting information of 9-design roulette effect (step S1688).

[SPSP direct development suggestion effect pattern selection processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 84 is a detailed flowchart of the SPSP direct development suggestive effect pattern selection process in step S1691 of FIG. Subsequent to the process of step S1682, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the variable effect pattern selected in the process of step S162 is a variable effect pattern capable of executing the SPSP direct development suggestive effect (see FIG. 42) ( Step S1692). Specifically, if the variation production pattern selected in the process of step S162 is a variation production pattern that directly develops to the SPSP reach production without passing through the normal reach production, the increase reach production, and the SP reach production, the SPSP is directly developed. It is determined that the variation effect pattern can execute the suggestion effect. On the other hand, when the variation production pattern is that the development progresses to the SPSP reach production after passing through at least one of these three reach productions, Judge that there is no. Here, if it is determined that the SPSP direct development suggestion effect is not a variable effect pattern that can be executed (step S1692: NO), the process proceeds to step S1697 described later.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the variation effect pattern can execute the SPSP direct development suggestion effect (step S1693: YES), for example, a lottery using a random number is performed, and a plurality of suggestion effect patterns are based on the lottery result. Is selected, and the selection result is set in the sub RAM 133 as setting information of the SPSP direct development suggesting effect (step S1694). By performing the SPSP direct development suggesting effect based on the setting information, a series of effect display illustrated in FIG. 42 is performed.

[Zone entry suggestion effect pattern selection processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 85 is a detailed flowchart of the zone entry suggestion effect pattern selection process in step S1697 of FIG. Subsequent to the process of step S1691, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the variable effect pattern selected in the process of step S162 is a variable effect pattern that can execute the zone entry suggestion effect (see FIGS. 43 and 44). (Step S1698). Specifically, whether or not the variation effect pattern selected in the process of step S162 is a variation effect pattern that is determined in advance as being able to execute a zone effect in a special effect mode called a dark side zone in the present embodiment. Determine whether. If it is determined that the variation effect pattern is not executable (step S1698: NO), the process proceeds to step S1703, which will be described later.

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the variation effect pattern can execute the zone effect (step S1698: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a lottery using, for example, a random number, and executes the zone entry suggestion effect based on the lottery result. Whether or not (step S1699). Here, when it is determined that the zone entry suggestion effect is to be executed (step S1699: YES), one of the plurality of suggestion effect patterns is selected, and the selection result is set as the zone entry suggestion effect setting information. (Step S1700). In the process of step S1700, specifically, it is determined which other even number of robot symbols to stop on the left and right of the middle row of robot 8 symbols. By performing the zone entry suggestion effect based on the setting information, a series of effect display illustrated in FIG. 43 is performed.

  Note that here, the case of determining whether to execute the zone entry suggestion effect by lottery using a random number has been described, but when the variable effect pattern in which the zone effect is to be executed is selected, A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that the zone entry suggestion effect is executed unconditionally.

[Car pattern matching effect pattern selection processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 86 is a detailed flowchart of the vehicle pattern matching effect pattern selection process in step S1703 of FIG. Subsequent to the processing in step S1697, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the variation effect pattern selected in the processing in step S162 is a variation effect pattern in which the SPSP reach development effect described above based on FIG. Is determined (step S1704). As the variation production pattern in which the SPSP reach development production effect is executed, the variation production pattern in which the SPSP reach production development follows the SPSP reach development production (of the success production pattern) and the SPSP reach development (of the failure production pattern). A variation production pattern that does not develop into an SPSP reach production following the production production. If it is determined that the SPSP reach development effect is not executed (step S1704: NO), the process proceeds to step S1709 described later.

  When the sub CPU 131 determines that the SPSP development effect is to be executed (step S1704: YES), for example, a lottery using a random number is performed, and based on the lottery result, the vehicle design described above based on FIGS. It is determined whether or not the uniform effect is executed (step S1705). Here, when it is determined that the car symbol matching effect is to be executed (step S1705: YES), for example, a lottery using a random number is performed, and based on the lottery result, one of a plurality of effect patterns of the car symbol matching effect is selected. Then, the selection result is set in the sub-RAM 133 as the setting information of the vehicle pattern matching effect (step S1706). As a result, it is determined which odd-numbered symbols in the left column, middle column, and right column are to be stopped, and in what order these vehicle symbols are to be stopped. By performing the vehicle symbol matching effect based on this setting information, a series of effect display illustrated in FIGS. 45 to 46 is performed.

[Car design slip effect pattern selection processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 87 is a detailed flowchart of the car symbol slip effect pattern selection process in step S1709 of FIG. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the car symbol that has been pseudo-stopped in the middle row, pretending to be lost in the final stage of the normal reach production, slides the even symbol in the right column to the 3 symbol pseudo-ream or 7 symbol pseudo-ream. An effect pattern to be developed is prepared (see FIG. 48).

  Following the process of step S1703, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the variable effect pattern selected in the process of step S162 is a variable effect pattern that develops into a pseudo-continuous notice effect by pretending to be lost at the end of the normal reach effect. Is determined (step S1710). Here, if it is determined that the variation effect pattern does not evolve into a pseudo continuous notice effect (step S1710: NO), the process proceeds to step S1715 described later.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the variation effect pattern develops into a pseudo-continuous notice effect at the end of the normal reach effect (step S1710: YES), for example, a lottery using a random number is performed, and based on the lottery result, Any one of a plurality of effect patterns of the car design slip effect is selected, and information indicating the selection result is set in the sub RAM 133 as setting information of the car symbol slip effect (step S1711). As a result, it is determined which symbol the odd symbol which is pseudo-stopped in the middle row and transformed into the vehicle symbol is to be used. By performing the vehicle symbol slip effect based on this setting information, a series of effect displays exemplified in FIGS. 48 to 49 are performed.

[Specific reach development suggesting effect pattern selection processing by effect control board 130]
FIG. 88 is a detailed flowchart of the specific reach development suggestion effect pattern selection process in step S1715 of FIG. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, one plate written “NEST” may be completed and developed into a specific reach production (see FIG. 47).

  Sub-CPU 131 determines whether or not the variation effect pattern selected in step S162 is a variation effect pattern that develops to a specific reach effect following the process of step S1709 (step S1716). Here, when it is determined that the variation effect pattern does not develop into the specific reach effect (step S1716: NO), the process proceeds to step S1720 described later.

  On the other hand, if the sub CPU 131 determines that the variation effect pattern develops into the specific reach effect (step S1716: YES), for example, the sub CPU 131 performs a lottery using a random number, and based on the lottery result, the specific reach development suggestion effect One of the effect patterns is selected, and information indicating the selection result is set in the sub-RAM 133 as setting information for the specific reach development suggesting effect (step S1717). As a result, even symbols that are pseudo-stopped to the left column and deformed to the left panel, even symbols that are pseudo-stopped to the middle column and deformed to the middle panel, even symbols that are pseudo-stopped to the right column and deformed to the right panel are determined. Is done. A specific reach development suggesting effect is performed based on this setting information, whereby a series of effect display illustrated in FIG. 47 is performed.

[7 design suggesting effect pattern selection process by effect control board 130]
FIG. 89 is a detailed flowchart of the 7 symbol suggestion effect pattern selection processing in step S1720 of FIG. Subsequent to the process of step S1715, the sub CPU 131 determines whether or not the variable effect pattern selected in the process of step S162 is a variable effect pattern capable of executing the seven symbol suggestion effect (see FIG. 37) (step S1615). S1721). Specifically, whether or not the variation effect pattern selected in the process of step S162 is a variation effect pattern determined in advance as being capable of executing a zone effect in a special effect mode called a turbo zone in the present embodiment. Determine. Here, when it is determined that the variation effect pattern is not capable of executing the zone effect (step S1721: NO), the process proceeds to step S170 (see FIG. 76).

  If the sub CPU 131 determines that the variation effect pattern can execute the zone effect (step S1721: YES), the sub CPU 131 executes a lottery using a random number, for example, and executes a 7 symbol suggestion effect based on the lottery result. It is determined whether or not (step S1722). If it is determined that the 7 symbol suggestion effect is to be executed (step S1722: YES), the effective period of the button operation in the 7 symbol suggestion effect is set (step S1723), and the operation pattern of the third effect actor 73 is set. (Step S1724). Thereby, the setting information of the 7 symbol suggestion effect (see FIG. 37) is set in the sub RAM 133.

  In addition, although the case where it determines by the lottery using a random number whether 7 symbol suggestion effect is performed was demonstrated here, when the variation effect pattern from which a zone effect is performed is selected, You may employ | adopt the structure determined as performing 7 symbol suggestion production unconditionally.

  Heretofore, with reference to FIGS. 80 to 89, an example of a method for setting the effect of a successful effect pattern of a notice effect using various decorative symbols has been described. The production of the production pattern can be executed even with the variation production pattern in which the respective notice productions cannot be executed. For example, if it is a zone entry suggestion effect (see FIGS. 43 to 44), it can be executed if it is a failure effect pattern or a gusset effect pattern even if the zone effect is not actually executed in the current variation effect. For this reason, in the effect pattern selection process of each notice effect, when it is determined that it is not a corresponding variation effect pattern, or when it is determined that it is not an executable variation effect pattern, the effect of the failure effect pattern or the gusset effect pattern Is determined by lottery using random numbers. As a result, the effect of the failure effect pattern or the gasse effect pattern of each notice effect is performed.

[Timer interrupt processing by image sound control board 140]
Next, a timer interrupt process executed in the image sound control board 140 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interruption process executed in the image sound control board 140. The image sound control board 140 repeatedly executes a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 90 at regular intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. To do.

  First, the overall CPU 141 executes an image output control process for controlling image display on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on a command received from the effect control board 130 (step S41). This image output control process will be described in detail later based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S41, the overall CPU 141 executes effect sound output control processing for outputting various effect sounds from the speaker 24 so as to be synchronized with the effect display performed on the liquid crystal screen 5 or asynchronously ( Step S42). The effect sound output control process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

  Subsequent to the process of step S42, the overall CPU 141 executes a data transmission control process (step S44). Specifically, data related to image sound control performed on the image sound control board 140 is transmitted to the effect control board 130. On the other hand, the effect control board 130 transfers the data received from the image sound control board 140 to the lamp control board 150. As a result, the frame lamp 25, the effect button 26, the effect objects 71 to 73, and the like are controlled so as to synchronize with the effect performed by the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24.

[Image Output Control Processing by Image Acoustic Control Board 140]
FIG. 91 is a detailed flowchart of the image output control process in step 41 of FIG. The overall CPU 141 first determines whether or not a command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S411). If it is determined that a command has not been received (step S411: NO), the process proceeds to step S42 described later.

  On the other hand, when determining that the command from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S411: YES), the overall CPU 141 sets the setting information included in the command in the control RAM 145 (step S412). Next, the overall CPU 141 determines how various effect images should be displayed on the liquid crystal screen 5 based on the set setting information, creates a display list for controlling the drawing process of the VDP 142, and performs control. The display list is stored in the RAM 145 (step S413), and the display list is set in the display list storage area 1491 (step S414).

[Production sound output control processing by the image sound control board 140]
92 and 93 are detailed flowcharts of the effect sound output control process in step 42 of FIG. Subsequent to step S41, the overall CPU 141 determines whether a command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S421). If it is determined that a command from the effect control board 130 has been received (step S421: YES), output of the received effect sound is started (step S422). For example, when a variation production start command is received, based on the setting information included in the variation production start command, it is determined how the production sound needs to be output along with the variation display of the decorative design, Based on the determination result, the audio DSP 143 is instructed to output the audio data stored in the audio ROM 146 from the speaker 24.

  When the overall CPU 141 executes the process of step S422 or determines that the command from the effect control board 130 has not been received (step S421: NO), the decoration pattern of the normal display mode is displayed in any of the three columns. It is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop the simulation (step S423). Specifically, for example, based on the display list created in the process of step S413 and the elapsed time since the start of the change effect according to the change effect start command, the decoration of the normal display mode in any column It is determined whether or not it is the timing when the symbol is pseudo-stopped. Note that, based on the progress of the drawing process of the VDP 142, it may be determined whether or not it is the timing at which the decorative symbol of the normal display mode is pseudo-stopped in any column. If it is determined that it is not the pseudo stop timing (step S423: NO), the process proceeds to step S44.

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that it is the timing at which the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped in any column (step S423: YES), for example, by referring to the display list stored in the control RAM 145, a plurality of decorations are displayed. It is determined whether or not the symbols are stopped simultaneously (step S424). Here, when it is determined that a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped simultaneously (step S424: YES), the process proceeds to step S434 (see FIG. 93) described later.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that a plurality of decorative symbols are not stopped simultaneously (step S424: NO), that is, if it is determined that there is only one decorative symbol to be pseudo-stopped, the decorative symbol is 3 symbols or 7 symbols. Whether or not (step S425). This determination can be made, for example, by referring to a display list stored in the control RAM 145, for example.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the decorative symbol to be pseudo-stopped is 3 symbols or 7 symbols (step S425: YES), the overall CPU 141 causes the acoustic DSP 143 to execute a process of outputting a special stop sound from the speaker 24 (step S426).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the decorative symbol to be pseudo-stopped is not the 3 symbol or 7 symbol (step S425: NO), for example, by referring to the display list stored in the control RAM 145, the decorative symbol is displayed. It is determined whether or not the pseudo stop column is the left column (step S427). If it is determined that the left column is present (step S427: YES), the acoustic DSP 143 is caused to execute a process of outputting a left column dedicated stop sound from the speaker 24 (step S428).

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that the column in which the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped is not the left column (step S427: NO), for example, by referring to the display list stored in the control RAM 145, the decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped. It is determined whether or not the column is a right column (step S429). Here, when it is determined that it is in the right column (step S429: YES), the sound DSP 143 is caused to execute a process of outputting the right column dedicated stop sound from the speaker 24 (step S430), and when it is determined that it is not in the right column. (Step S429: NO) causes the acoustic DSP 143 to execute a process of outputting the middle row dedicated stop sound from the speaker 24 (step S431).

  By the way, in this embodiment, the special stop sound corresponding to 3 symbols and 7 symbols, the left column dedicated stop sound corresponding to the left column, the middle column dedicated stop sound corresponding to the middle column, and the right corresponding to the right column The row-specific stop sound is set to a different sound. For this reason, when a plurality of decorative symbols are simultaneously pseudo-stopped, if the corresponding stop sounds are output together, it becomes difficult for the player to hear the stop sound, and as a result, the stop sound is output. There is a risk of reducing the interest of. For this reason, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of decorative symbols are simultaneously pseudo-stopped, the following processing is performed.

  That is, when the overall CPU 141 determines that a plurality of decorative symbols are to be pseudo-stopped simultaneously (step S424: YES), as illustrated in FIG. 93, the plurality of decorative symbols to be pseudo-stopped simultaneously include three symbols or seven symbols. It is determined whether or not it is (step S434). This determination can be made by referring to the display list stored in the control RAM 145. Here, when it is determined that 3 symbols or 7 symbols are included (step S434: YES), a special stop sound is output in the same manner as the process of step S426 (step S435).

  On the other hand, if the overall CPU 141 determines that the 3 symbols and 7 symbols are not included in the plurality of decorative symbols to be pseudo-stopped at the same time (step S424: NO), is any of these decorative symbols pseudo-stopped in the middle row? It is determined whether or not (step S436). This determination can be made by referring to the display list stored in the control RAM 145. If the overall CPU 141 determines that any of the decorative symbols is pseudo-stopped in the middle row (step S436: YES), the overall CPU 141 outputs a middle row dedicated stop sound (step S437) in the same manner as the processing in step S431.

  As a result, even if the decorative symbols are pseudo-stopped at the same time in the middle row and the other rows (either the left row and / or the right row), only the middle row dedicated stop sound is output.

  If the overall CPU 141 determines that any of the decorative symbols does not stop in the middle row (step S436: NO), that is, if the decorative symbols stop simultaneously in the left and right columns, One of the right-row dedicated stop sounds is output to the acoustic SDP 143 (step S438). As specific processing, it is determined in advance whether to output a stop sound exclusively for the left column or a stop sound for the right column. An example is a process of outputting a predetermined dedicated stop sound. In addition, for example, it is possible to compare the types of decorative symbols to be pseudo-stopped in the left column and the right column, and output either one of the left column dedicated stop sound and the right column dedicated stop sound based on the comparison result. Good. For example, when an odd number of symbols other than 3 and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped in the right column at the same time as an even number of symbols in the left column is pseudo-stopped, the odd number of symbols will stop more than the even number of symbols will stop. For emphasis, outputting an exclusive stop sound for the right column is an example.

  In this embodiment, a case where various stop sounds (normal stop sound, special stop sound, dedicated stop sound for each column) are output when each decorative symbol is pseudo-stopped is described, but in other embodiments, These stop sounds may be output when the decorative symbols are fully stopped.

[Timer interrupt processing by lamp control board 150]
Next, timer interrupt processing executed in the lamp control board 150 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed in the lamp control board 150. The lamp control board 150 is transmitted from the image sound control board 140 via the command from the effect control board 130 and the effect control board 130 in a normal operation except for special cases such as when the power is turned on and when the power is turned off. 94, a series of processes illustrated in FIG. 94 are repeatedly executed at regular intervals.

  First, the lamp CPU 151 of the lamp control board 150 executes a data reception process for receiving data relating to image sound control transmitted from the image sound control board 140 via the effect control board 130 (step S601). Based on the data relating to the image sound control received by the process of step S601, the lamp CPU 151 performs various effect means (the effect button 26, the effect actors 71 to 73, etc.) so as to synchronize with the effect by the liquid crystal screen 5 and the speaker 24. ) To control.

  The lamp CPU 151 determines whether or not the variable effect start command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received following the process of step S601 (step S602). Here, if it is determined that the variation effect start command has been received (step S602: YES), the light emission pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the received variation effect start command is read from the lamp ROM 152 and set in the lamp RAM 153. By doing so, the light emission patterns of the panel lamp 25, the frame lamp 37, the light emitting elements provided in the effect actors 71 to 73, the button lamp 262, etc. are set (step S603). Following the processing of step S603, the lamp CPU 151 starts light emission control of each light emitting element based on the set light emission pattern data (step S604).

  Next, the lamp CPU 151 determines whether or not the operation of the effect actors 71 to 73 during the symbol variation is instructed by the received variation effect start command (step S605). If it is determined that the operations of the production actors 71 to 73 are instructed (step S605: YES), the operation pattern data corresponding to the received variation production start command is read from the lamp ROM 152 and set in the lamp RAM 153. Thus, the operation patterns of the production actors 71 to 73 are set (step S606).

  The lamp CPU 151 determines that the operation of the effect actors 71 to 73 is not instructed when the process of step S606 is executed, when it is determined that the variable effect start command is not received (step S602: NO). In the case (step S605: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the projecting timing of the effect button 26 (step S607). Specifically, the image acoustic control data received in step S601 is analyzed, and the button image illustrated in FIG. 11G, the button image illustrated in FIG. It is determined whether it is the projecting timing of the effect button 26 based on whether it is the display start timing of the button image exemplified in 13 (F). Here, it is determined that it is the projecting timing of the effect button 26. If so (step S607: YES), the drive of the button motor 261 is controlled to control the effect button 26 in the protruding state (step S608).

  When the lamp CPU 151 executes the process of step S608 or determines that it is not the projecting timing of the effect button 26 (step S607: NO), is it the start timing of the effective period in which the operation of the effect button 26 is valid? It is determined whether or not (step S609). Specifically, for example, the data regarding the image acoustic control received in the process of step S601 is analyzed, and based on whether or not it is the display start timing of the gauge image illustrated in FIGS. It is determined whether it is a start timing (step S609). Here, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the effective period (step S609: YES), the light emission control of the button lamp 262 incorporated in the effect button 26 is started (step S610). The light emission of the button lamp 262 is continued until the operation of the effect button 26 is detected during the effective period or until the effective period ends without detecting the operation.

  When the lamp CPU 151 executes the process of step S610 or determines that it is not the start timing of the effective period (step S609: NO), whether or not the variable effect end command transmitted from the effect control board 130 has been received. Is determined (step S611). Here, if it is determined that the variable effect end command has been received (step S611: YES), the light emission control started in the process of step S604 described above is ended (step S612).

  When the lamp CPU 151 determines that it has not received the variable effect end command (step S611: NO), or when the process of step S612 is executed, it is determined whether or not the effect button 26 (or the cross key 27) has been operated. Determination is made (step S613). Specifically, the effect button 26 is based on whether or not a detection signal from the sensor that detects the operation of the effect button 26 (or a detection signal from the sensor that detects the operation of each key of the cross key 27) is input. It is determined whether (or any key of the cross key 27) has been operated.

  When the lamp CPU 151 determines that the effect button 26 (or the cross key 27) has been operated (step S613: YES), the lamp CPU 151 transmits an operation command to that effect to the effect control board 130 (step S614).

[Operational effects of this embodiment]
(1) According to the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display mode can be changed to either or both of the first display mode and the first display mode during the decorative symbol variation display (see FIG. 21). Thus, execution of various effects is suggested by the display mode of the decorative design changing to the first display mode or the second display mode. For this reason, the player can enjoy the game while seeing that the display mode of the decorative design has changed and expecting to develop the display according to the display mode. Can be improved effectively.

(2) Further, in the present embodiment, there is a case where an effect of changing the reach pattern is executed during the execution of the effect corresponding to the reach establishment (for example, SPSP reach effect) (see FIG. 11). It is possible to effectively improve the interest of the production.

(3) Further, in this embodiment, since a stop sound is output with the false stop of the decorative symbol, the player can easily recognize that the decorative symbol is falsely stopped. In addition, a special stop sound is output with the pseudo stop of 3 symbols and 7 symbols, and a normal stop sound is output with the pseudo stop of other symbols, so that the pseudo stop sound is output based on the type of stop sound to be output. It is possible for the player to easily determine whether the stop is 3 symbols (or 7 symbols) or another decorative symbol.

(4) Further, in the present embodiment, the projecting state suggesting effect (FIG. 12B-1) suggests that the effect button 26 is controlled to the projecting state before the effective period of the button effect comes. )) May be executed. For this reason, it is possible for the player to know in advance that the effect button 26 is controlled to be in the protruding state, and to effectively improve the interest of the effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 26. Is possible.
Moreover, in this embodiment, the suggestion effect which suggests that the effect button 26 is controlled to the protrusion state during an effective period (refer FIG. 11 (G), FIG. 12 (B-1), FIG. 13 (F)). May be executed. Therefore, the player can easily grasp that the effect button 26 is controlled to the protruding state based on the suggestion effect without looking at the effect button 26, and the operation of the effect button 26 can be performed by the game. It is possible to effectively improve the interest of the direction urged by the person.

(5) In the present embodiment, as described above with respect to the pressing icon change effect of FIGS. 24 and 25, the icon display mode that suggests that the first special symbol is being displayed is the first display. Prior to the change from the mode (for example, white) to the second display mode (for example, red), a suggestive effect that suggests the second display mode may be executed (FIGS. 24F to 24I). 25 (A) to (C)). For this reason, the player can recognize in advance what display mode the icon display mode will change, and an effect (in this case, that indicates the status of symbol variation) It is possible to effectively improve the interest of the icon display.
Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with respect to the pressing icon change effect of FIGS. 26 and 27, the display mode of the hold icon that suggests that the first special symbol determination is held is the first display mode (for example, Prior to the change from the white color to the second display mode (for example, red), the suggestive effect suggesting the second display mode may be executed (FIGS. 26F to 26I and FIG. 27A). ) To (C)). For this reason, the player can recognize in advance in what display mode the display mode of the hold icon changes, and an effect that suggests a situation of symbol variation (that symbol variation is suspended) ( Here, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of display of the hold icon.

(6) Further, in this embodiment, as described above with respect to the SPSP direct development suggestion effect of FIG. 42, the zone entry suggestion effect of FIG. 43, the vehicle pattern matching effect of FIG. 45, and the specific reach development suggestion effect of FIG. Prior to the execution of the effect, the display mode of the plurality of decorative symbols may be controlled to a display mode that suggests the execution of the specific effect. For this reason, it is possible for the player to recognize in advance that the specific effect is executed, and it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect using the decorative design.

(7) Further, in this embodiment, for example, when notifying that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “losing”, the decorative symbol is not randomly stopped (or stopped) at random. In the case of a pseudo stop (or this stop) with a combination that does not include a specific decorative symbol (7 symbols in the present embodiment), and a combination that includes a specific decorative symbol (7 symbols in the present exemplary embodiment) (Or this stop). For this reason, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the effect of falsely stopping (or stopping) the decorative symbol.

(8) In the present embodiment, when the reliability for the jackpot is relatively low, the reach effect is easily executed in a state where the reach symbol is composed of a decorative symbol different from the seven symbols. When the reliability is relatively high, the reach effect is easily executed in a state where the reach symbol is composed of 7 symbols (see FIGS. 19 and 20). On the other hand, when the reach effect is executed in a state where the reach symbol is composed of 7 symbols under the specific condition that the reach symbol and the effective line increase, the above reach symbol is composed of 7 symbols. The reliability for the jackpot is lower than when the reach effect is executed in the state. That is, even if the reach symbol is composed of seven symbols in the same manner, the reliability with respect to the jackpot varies depending on whether or not it is under a specific condition. Therefore, the player can grasp the level of reliability with respect to the jackpot based on whether or not the reach symbol is composed of 7 symbols, and the interest of the reach effect can be understood. It is possible to improve the performance.

(9) In the present embodiment, as an effect based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, in addition to the effect (see FIG. 9 (F)) for notifying that it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, a predetermined There is a case where an effect (see FIG. 9 (G)) suggesting development to a subsequent effect (see FIG. 10 (A)) executed after the preceding effect (see FIG. 9 (F)) is executed. For this reason, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the production based on the determination result of whether or not to execute the jackpot game.

[Variation related to button production]
In the above embodiment, the case where the first mode of the effect button 26 is in the normal state and the second mode is in the protruding state has been described. On the other hand, in other embodiments, the first aspect and the second aspect may be other aspects.

(Stopped state and operating state)
For example, the first aspect may be a stop state in which the effect button is stopped, and the second aspect may be an operation state in which at least a part of the effect button is operating. FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram for describing a modified example of the button effect. In another embodiment, the effect button as the input means may be an effect button 265 including a button body 266 and a rotating body 267 as illustrated in FIG. 95 (A).

  The button body 266 is a push button for inputting operation information when pressed by the player. The button body 266 is different from the effect button 26 in that the button body 266 is not configured to move up and down between the normal state and the protruding state like the effect button 26 in the above embodiment. It may be configured to be movable.

  The rotating body 267 is a cylindrical member disposed along the side surface of the button body 266. The rotating body 267 is configured to be rotated clockwise (in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 95A) in a plan view by a driving force from a motor (not shown).

  The effect button 265 configured in this way can be in at least two states: a first state where the rotator 267 is stationary and a second state where the rotator 267 is rotating. And it is possible to control the production | generation button 265 to a 1st state or a 2nd state with the arrival of the effective period when operation of the production | presentation button 265 becomes effective.

  The following effects can be considered for the control for setting the effect button 265 to the second state. That is, before the effect button 265 is controlled to the second state, the suggestion effect indicating that effect is executed (see FIG. 95B). In the example shown in FIG. 95 (B), an effect display is performed in which the periphery of the effect button 265 is swirled, and the player has the impression that the rotating body 267 of the effect button 265 will soon move. It is possible to give Then, when the effect button 265 starts to be controlled to the second state and becomes a valid period, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 95C, a button representing a state in which four arrows are rotating around the button body 266. The effect display which displays an image and the gauge image which shows the remaining time of an effective period is performed. During the effective period, the display of this button image suggests that the effect button 265 is being controlled to the second state. Here, the case where the button image suggests that the effect button 265 is being controlled to the second state is illustrated, but the effect button 265 is displayed by an effect different from the display of the button image. You may employ | adopt the structure which suggests being under control in the 2nd state.

(Non-vibration state and vibration state)
In other embodiments, for example, the effect button 26 may be configured to vibrate by a vibrator (not shown). That is, the effect button 26 may employ a configuration that can be controlled to any one of a plurality of states including a non-vibration state (first aspect) and a vibration state (second aspect). In this case, the effect button 26 may be configured to be controllable in a normal state (see FIG. 3A) and a protruding state (see FIG. 3B), or such control is not possible. It may be configured to be possible.

  In such a configuration, when the effect button 26 is controlled to be in a vibration state as the effective period of the effect button 26 comes, it is preferable to perform the following effects. That is, first, before the effect button 26 is controlled to the vibration state, a suggestion effect indicating that effect is performed. As this suggestion effect, a button image imitating the effect button 26 may be displayed on the screen without a gauge image, and an effect display indicating that this button image starts to be controlled in a vibration state may be performed. When the effective period is started, it is conceivable that a button image representing a state in which the effect button 26 is vibrating is displayed on the screen together with the gauge image, and the player is prompted to operate the button.

(Normal emission state and special emission state)
Moreover, in other embodiment, the production | generation button 26 is a structure which can be controlled to either of the some aspect containing a normal light emission state (1st aspect) and a special light emission state (2nd aspect), for example. Also good. An example of the normal light emission state is a state in which the button lamp 262 built in the effect button 26 emits light in red, for example. Further, as an example of the special light emission state, a state in which the button lamp 262 blinks rapidly in red, for example.

  With respect to such a configuration, when the effect button is controlled to the special light emission state as the effective period of the effect button 26 arrives, the following effects may be performed. For example, before the effect button 26 is controlled to the special light emission state, an indication effect that suggests that effect is performed. An example of the suggestion effect is to perform an effect display indicating that the button image imitating the effect button 26 blinks and the blinking time interval gradually decreases. Then, when the effective period is started, a button image indicating that the effect button 26 is just blinking is displayed on the screen together with the gauge image, and the player is prompted to operate the button. It is done.

(First state, second state, third state)
Moreover, in other embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 95D to 95F, the effect button, the cylindrical member 26A, and the columnar member 26B may be configured. Here, the cylindrical member 26A is a cylindrical member arranged outside the column member 26B, and is configured to be movable up and down with respect to the frame member 3 by a driving force from a motor (not shown). The columnar member 26B is a columnar member disposed inside the cylindrical member 26A, and is configured to be movable up and down with respect to the cylindrical member 26A by a driving force from a motor (not shown).

  In the case of the effect button configured as described above, the cylindrical member 26A and the columnar member 26B are not projected in the first state (see FIG. 95D), the cylindrical member as the effective period of the effect button comes. 26A and the cylindrical member 26B protrude to the same height (see FIG. 95E), and the cylindrical member 26A protrudes to substantially the same height as in the second state and is cylindrical with respect to the cylindrical member 26A. It is conceivable to control to any one of the third states in which the member 26B protrudes (see FIG. 95F).

On the other hand, when the effect button is controlled to the second state with the arrival of the effective period, a suggestion effect indicating that effect is performed before being controlled to the second state, and during the effective period, It is preferable to perform a suggestive effect that suggests being controlled to the second state.
In addition, when the effect button is controlled to the third state with the arrival of the effective period, a suggestion effect indicating that effect is performed before being controlled to the third state. It is preferable to perform a suggestive effect that suggests that the state is controlled.

  Note that the case where the input means that can be input by the player is the effect button has been described so far, but the input means is not limited to this, and a touch panel that can detect the player's touch operation, for example, a game board An optical sensor that can detect a player's hand held over 2; a joystick; an operating means that can be held and pushed by the player; an operating means that can be held and changed by the player; Other input means may be used.

[Modified example of chance eye production]
In the above-described embodiment, the case where the chance eye effect is realized in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. However, the same effect as the chance eye effect described above can be performed in the rotating game machine. .
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 96 to FIG. 97, an effect similar to the chance eye effect in the spinning type gaming machine will be described. Here, FIG. 96 is an explanatory view exemplifying a reel arrangement in a spinning cylinder type gaming machine. FIG. 97 is an explanatory diagram for describing a modified example of the chance eye effect.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 97, a picture is drawn on the left reel, the middle reel, and the right reel in the spinning machine. In a spinning machine, each reel is stopped so that it stops at any timing from the timing of the reel rotation stop operation by the player until the time on which the pattern drawn on the surface of the reel can move by 4 patterns has elapsed. Control is performed.

  In this rotating type gaming machine, the rectangular pattern 300 drawn on the peripheral surface of the left reel functions as a specific decorative pattern in the same manner as the seven patterns in the above embodiment. For example, when the possibility of shifting to the special gaming state is relatively high in the subsequent fluctuations, the player performs a reel rotation stop operation of the left reel aiming at stopping the rectangular pattern 300 on the left reel frame or the upper left reel. Is performed, stop control of the left reel is performed so that the rectangular picture 300 stops at the upper or lower level in the frame (see FIGS. 97A and 97B).

  On the other hand, when the possibility of shifting to the special gaming state is relatively low in the subsequent fluctuations, the player has performed the reel rotation stop operation of the left reel at a timing at which the rectangular pattern 300 can be stopped within the frame. Even so, stop control of the left reel is performed so as not to stop the rectangular picture 300 within the frame (see FIG. 97C).

[Other variations]
In addition, it cannot be overemphasized that the structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 demonstrated in the said embodiment and the operation | movement aspect of each member are only examples, and can implement | achieve this invention also with another structure and operation | movement aspect. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the threshold value used for determination, etc. in the flowcharts described above are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other orders and values without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say. The screen diagrams and the like exemplified in the above embodiment are merely examples, and other modes may be used.

  In another embodiment, the production control board 130 performs part of the processing executed on the image sound control board 140, or part of the processing executed on the production control board 130. 140 may be executed. Further, the effect control board 130 and the image sound control board 140 are integrally configured so that the process executed on the effect control board 130 and the process executed on the image sound control board 150 are executed by one control board. May be.

1 Pachinko machine 5 Liquid crystal screen (liquid crystal display)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 11 1st starting port 12 2nd starting port 13 Grand prize opening 24 Speaker 26 Direction button 41 1st special symbol display 42 2nd special symbol display 100 Game control board 101 Main CPU
102 Main ROM
103 Main RAM
130 Production control board 131 Sub CPU
132 Sub ROM
133 Sub RAM
134 RTC
140 Image Sound Control Board 141 General CPU
142 VDP
143 Acoustic DSP
144 ROM for control
145 RAM for control
146 ROM for sound
147 SDRAM
149 VRAM
150 Lamp control board 151 Lamp CPU
152 Lamp ROM
153 Lamp RAM

By the way, traditional gaming machine, the interest of the director in the effective period of time input to the input means of the player is not necessarily high.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the amusement of the effect in the valid period input to the input means.

The present invention employs the following configuration in order to solve the above problems.
The gaming machine according to the present invention includes an input means that can be input by a player, a special game determination means that determines whether or not a special game advantageous to the player is executed when a start condition is established, and the special game. When it is determined to be executed by the special game determination means, a special game execution means for executing the special game and an input effect according to the input when there is an input to the input means during a predetermined period The possible input effect execution means, the aspect control means capable of controlling the input means to the first aspect or the second aspect as the predetermined period arrives, and the input means is the first aspect a first notification effect execution unit capable of executing a first notification effect for notifying a second notification effect execution unit capable of executing a second notification effect that the entering force means for notifying the second aspect der Rukoto equipped with, before entry The effects include a first input effect and a second input effect different from the first input effect, rather than a case where there is an input to the input means when the first notification effect is being executed. The execution rate of the second input effect is higher when there is an input to the input means when the second notification effect is being executed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the director in the valid period input to the input means.

Claims (1)

Input means that can be input by the player;
Special game determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player when the start condition is satisfied;
Special game execution means for executing the special game when the special game is determined to be executed by the special game determination means;
When there is an input from the input means during a predetermined period, an effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect according to the input;
Aspect control means capable of controlling the input means to the first aspect or the second aspect as the predetermined period arrives;
A gaming machine comprising: an suggestion effect executing means capable of executing an suggestion effect suggesting that the input means is controlled to the second aspect by the aspect control means.

Images